<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Sebastian+Gosch</id>
	<title>VACC Austria DokuWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Sebastian+Gosch"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php/Special:Contributions/Sebastian_Gosch"/>
	<updated>2026-05-09T08:03:40Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.9</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4399</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4399"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T12:57:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become an efficient Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower's main responsibility is to make efficient use of all available RWY's.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is therefore responsible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope visibility range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft Categories  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A/C are categorized by their respective weight and approach IAS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Weight Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into four weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircraft in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Approach Speed  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theoretical Knowledge ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a control zone (CTR) which is class D airspace. This means that A/C need a clearance for entry. So either they are cleared for an approach or they are cleared into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tower Workflow  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dynamic spots on an airport. Aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. In general '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''', nevertheless there are exceptions to this rule which will be described in the upcoming chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give a takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the A/C is well established in climb check if squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway separation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the Proceedings aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224: Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR: AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land at your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289: Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR Traffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve genehmigt.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave Control Zone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Squawk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the Control Zone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4398</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4398"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T11:20:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Landing Clearance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	Low visibility procedures exist to support Low Visibility Operations at Aerodromes when either surface visibility is sufficiently low to prejudice safe ground movement without additional procedural controls or the prevailing cloud base is sufficiently low to preclude pilots obtaining the required visual reference to continue to landing at the equivalent of an ILS Cat 1 DH/DA. [[https://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/Low_Visibility_Procedures_(LVP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: RVR/CAT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR = Runway Visual Range (Landebahnsicht)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR is being measured at three points along the runway: &amp;quot;Touchdown Zone&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Mid Point&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Stop End&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ILS-Category|| Minimum RVR || Decision Height (DH)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat I || 550 meters or visibility 800 meters || 200ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat II ||  300 meters || 100ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIa || 200 meters || 100 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIb || 75 - 50 meters || 50 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIc || keine RVR Begrenzung|| nil&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: Vertical Visibility ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical visibility is given in ft AGL. For LVP only BKN, OVC or VV are relevant. The latter being general vertical visibility with sufficient reduction of visibility not based on a specific cloud type. The values given in the metar are rounded down to the lowest 100ft value. OVC002 therefore means OVC between &amp;gt;200 and ≤300.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, in real life only RVR is considered in the decision making process whether LVP is being activated or not. This does not apply to VATSIM operations due to various factors, including but not limited to the depiction of visibility in various simulator-weather-addons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/ac/data/dokumente/LO_Circ_2020_A_15_en_2020-10-30_1110129.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Decision Making Process (LOWW) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to determine whether ot not LVP has to be used, two factors have to be considered: Ceiling (lowest OVC or BKN cloud layer or vertical visibility) and RVR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exact criteria refer to [[#LVP Criteria For Airports|LVP Criteria For Airports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots need to be informed about the activity of LVP. To do this, add „&amp;amp;lvp“ at the end of the Uniatis-String. This will result in the following text to be recieved by the pilots:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOW VISIBILITY PROCEDURES IN '''OPERATION'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Landing Clearance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During LVP Landing Clearances should be given:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Arriving A/C 2 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In exceptional circumstances at 1 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note: &amp;quot;Should&amp;quot; be given - this is not a requirement per se, but rather considered as guidance for the ATCO. There is '''no''' need to inform a Pilot to expect a &amp;quot;late landing clearance&amp;quot; as this phraseology '''does not exist'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sequencing On Final ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lower visibilities require enlarged separation minima on final depending on the actual conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT II radar separation on final: 4nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT III radar separation on final: 6nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Considerations For Takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*During '''LVP Stage 2 or 3''', departing TFC should be cleared for takeoff before the next inbound for the same runway is closer that '''6nm from threshold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''As soon as the METAR indicates an RVR value e.g: R16/P1500N you are required to transmit this value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real life the controller will be provided with 3 RVR values: Touchdown Zone, Mid-Point, Stop-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Takeoff Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA94, RVR 550, 650, and 800 meters, wind 250 degrees 6 knots, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RVR Above maximum measurable value (1500m)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R16/'''P'''1500N &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 16 Cleared for takeoff&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The words &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; are induced by the preceeding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; which indicates an RVR value '''ABOVE''' 1500m. (It is not possible to measure an RVR greater than 1500m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VATSIM vs. Real Life'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the VATSIM METAR only provides one RVR Value (Touchdown Zone RVR) you may choose to add the remaining two values at your discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA26, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters RWY 16 Cleared to land. &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that only dictating value is indicated in the METAR string - It defines the Touchdown Zone RVR, and thus should be used as a reference when applying the above mentioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same applies to Takeoff Clearances:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No distinction is being made upon clearing an aircraft for an ILS approach in regard to the LVP-stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LVP Criteria For Airports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWW ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 16 &amp;amp; 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWL ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runway: 26. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWK ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway 28R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization from authority (MA-climb 4,7%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 800m or more '''AND''' ceiling 300 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 800m '''OR''' ceiling less than 300 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II or CAT III runways: none. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No explicit procedures for arriving traffic are published. Use best judgement and consider minima-values published on approach plates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also check further information in the [[LOWI_Primer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWG ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 35C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway: 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization (see special chart)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility and RVR 1500m or more '''AND''' ceiling 600 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility or RVR less than 1500m '''OR''' ceiling less than 600 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Procedures]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4397</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4397"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T11:20:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Landing Clearance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	Low visibility procedures exist to support Low Visibility Operations at Aerodromes when either surface visibility is sufficiently low to prejudice safe ground movement without additional procedural controls or the prevailing cloud base is sufficiently low to preclude pilots obtaining the required visual reference to continue to landing at the equivalent of an ILS Cat 1 DH/DA. [[https://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/Low_Visibility_Procedures_(LVP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: RVR/CAT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR = Runway Visual Range (Landebahnsicht)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR is being measured at three points along the runway: &amp;quot;Touchdown Zone&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Mid Point&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Stop End&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ILS-Category|| Minimum RVR || Decision Height (DH)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat I || 550 meters or visibility 800 meters || 200ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat II ||  300 meters || 100ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIa || 200 meters || 100 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIb || 75 - 50 meters || 50 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIc || keine RVR Begrenzung|| nil&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: Vertical Visibility ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical visibility is given in ft AGL. For LVP only BKN, OVC or VV are relevant. The latter being general vertical visibility with sufficient reduction of visibility not based on a specific cloud type. The values given in the metar are rounded down to the lowest 100ft value. OVC002 therefore means OVC between &amp;gt;200 and ≤300.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, in real life only RVR is considered in the decision making process whether LVP is being activated or not. This does not apply to VATSIM operations due to various factors, including but not limited to the depiction of visibility in various simulator-weather-addons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/ac/data/dokumente/LO_Circ_2020_A_15_en_2020-10-30_1110129.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Decision Making Process (LOWW) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to determine whether ot not LVP has to be used, two factors have to be considered: Ceiling (lowest OVC or BKN cloud layer or vertical visibility) and RVR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exact criteria refer to [[#LVP Criteria For Airports|LVP Criteria For Airports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots need to be informed about the activity of LVP. To do this, add „&amp;amp;lvp“ at the end of the Uniatis-String. This will result in the following text to be recieved by the pilots:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOW VISIBILITY PROCEDURES IN '''OPERATION'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Landing Clearance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During LVP Landing Clearances should be given:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Arriving A/C 2 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In exceptional circumstances at 1 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note: &amp;quot;Should&amp;quot; be given - this is not a requirement per se, but rather considered as guidance for the ATCO. There is '''no''' need to inform a Pilot about a &amp;quot;late landing clearance&amp;quot; as this phraseology '''does not exist'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sequencing On Final ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lower visibilities require enlarged separation minima on final depending on the actual conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT II radar separation on final: 4nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT III radar separation on final: 6nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Considerations For Takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*During '''LVP Stage 2 or 3''', departing TFC should be cleared for takeoff before the next inbound for the same runway is closer that '''6nm from threshold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''As soon as the METAR indicates an RVR value e.g: R16/P1500N you are required to transmit this value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real life the controller will be provided with 3 RVR values: Touchdown Zone, Mid-Point, Stop-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Takeoff Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA94, RVR 550, 650, and 800 meters, wind 250 degrees 6 knots, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RVR Above maximum measurable value (1500m)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R16/'''P'''1500N &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 16 Cleared for takeoff&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The words &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; are induced by the preceeding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; which indicates an RVR value '''ABOVE''' 1500m. (It is not possible to measure an RVR greater than 1500m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VATSIM vs. Real Life'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the VATSIM METAR only provides one RVR Value (Touchdown Zone RVR) you may choose to add the remaining two values at your discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA26, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters RWY 16 Cleared to land. &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that only dictating value is indicated in the METAR string - It defines the Touchdown Zone RVR, and thus should be used as a reference when applying the above mentioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same applies to Takeoff Clearances:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No distinction is being made upon clearing an aircraft for an ILS approach in regard to the LVP-stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LVP Criteria For Airports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWW ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 16 &amp;amp; 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWL ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runway: 26. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWK ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway 28R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization from authority (MA-climb 4,7%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 800m or more '''AND''' ceiling 300 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 800m '''OR''' ceiling less than 300 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II or CAT III runways: none. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No explicit procedures for arriving traffic are published. Use best judgement and consider minima-values published on approach plates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also check further information in the [[LOWI_Primer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWG ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 35C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway: 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization (see special chart)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility and RVR 1500m or more '''AND''' ceiling 600 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility or RVR less than 1500m '''OR''' ceiling less than 600 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Procedures]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4396</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4396"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T11:20:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Landing Clearance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	Low visibility procedures exist to support Low Visibility Operations at Aerodromes when either surface visibility is sufficiently low to prejudice safe ground movement without additional procedural controls or the prevailing cloud base is sufficiently low to preclude pilots obtaining the required visual reference to continue to landing at the equivalent of an ILS Cat 1 DH/DA. [[https://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/Low_Visibility_Procedures_(LVP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: RVR/CAT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR = Runway Visual Range (Landebahnsicht)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR is being measured at three points along the runway: &amp;quot;Touchdown Zone&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Mid Point&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Stop End&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ILS-Category|| Minimum RVR || Decision Height (DH)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat I || 550 meters or visibility 800 meters || 200ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat II ||  300 meters || 100ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIa || 200 meters || 100 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIb || 75 - 50 meters || 50 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIc || keine RVR Begrenzung|| nil&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: Vertical Visibility ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical visibility is given in ft AGL. For LVP only BKN, OVC or VV are relevant. The latter being general vertical visibility with sufficient reduction of visibility not based on a specific cloud type. The values given in the metar are rounded down to the lowest 100ft value. OVC002 therefore means OVC between &amp;gt;200 and ≤300.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, in real life only RVR is considered in the decision making process whether LVP is being activated or not. This does not apply to VATSIM operations due to various factors, including but not limited to the depiction of visibility in various simulator-weather-addons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/ac/data/dokumente/LO_Circ_2020_A_15_en_2020-10-30_1110129.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Decision Making Process (LOWW) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to determine whether ot not LVP has to be used, two factors have to be considered: Ceiling (lowest OVC or BKN cloud layer or vertical visibility) and RVR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exact criteria refer to [[#LVP Criteria For Airports|LVP Criteria For Airports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots need to be informed about the activity of LVP. To do this, add „&amp;amp;lvp“ at the end of the Uniatis-String. This will result in the following text to be recieved by the pilots:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOW VISIBILITY PROCEDURES IN '''OPERATION'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Landing Clearance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During LVP Landing Clearances should be given:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Arriving A/C 2 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In exceptional circumstances at 1 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note: They &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; be given - this is not a requirement per se, but rather considered as guidance for the ATCO. There is '''no''' need to inform a Pilot about a &amp;quot;late landing clearance&amp;quot; as this phraseology '''does not exist'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sequencing On Final ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lower visibilities require enlarged separation minima on final depending on the actual conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT II radar separation on final: 4nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT III radar separation on final: 6nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Considerations For Takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*During '''LVP Stage 2 or 3''', departing TFC should be cleared for takeoff before the next inbound for the same runway is closer that '''6nm from threshold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''As soon as the METAR indicates an RVR value e.g: R16/P1500N you are required to transmit this value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real life the controller will be provided with 3 RVR values: Touchdown Zone, Mid-Point, Stop-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Takeoff Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA94, RVR 550, 650, and 800 meters, wind 250 degrees 6 knots, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RVR Above maximum measurable value (1500m)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R16/'''P'''1500N &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 16 Cleared for takeoff&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The words &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; are induced by the preceeding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; which indicates an RVR value '''ABOVE''' 1500m. (It is not possible to measure an RVR greater than 1500m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VATSIM vs. Real Life'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the VATSIM METAR only provides one RVR Value (Touchdown Zone RVR) you may choose to add the remaining two values at your discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA26, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters RWY 16 Cleared to land. &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that only dictating value is indicated in the METAR string - It defines the Touchdown Zone RVR, and thus should be used as a reference when applying the above mentioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same applies to Takeoff Clearances:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No distinction is being made upon clearing an aircraft for an ILS approach in regard to the LVP-stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LVP Criteria For Airports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWW ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 16 &amp;amp; 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWL ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runway: 26. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWK ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway 28R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization from authority (MA-climb 4,7%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 800m or more '''AND''' ceiling 300 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 800m '''OR''' ceiling less than 300 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II or CAT III runways: none. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No explicit procedures for arriving traffic are published. Use best judgement and consider minima-values published on approach plates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also check further information in the [[LOWI_Primer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWG ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 35C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway: 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization (see special chart)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility and RVR 1500m or more '''AND''' ceiling 600 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility or RVR less than 1500m '''OR''' ceiling less than 600 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Procedures]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4395</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4395"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T11:18:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* ATIS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	Low visibility procedures exist to support Low Visibility Operations at Aerodromes when either surface visibility is sufficiently low to prejudice safe ground movement without additional procedural controls or the prevailing cloud base is sufficiently low to preclude pilots obtaining the required visual reference to continue to landing at the equivalent of an ILS Cat 1 DH/DA. [[https://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/Low_Visibility_Procedures_(LVP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: RVR/CAT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR = Runway Visual Range (Landebahnsicht)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR is being measured at three points along the runway: &amp;quot;Touchdown Zone&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Mid Point&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Stop End&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ILS-Category|| Minimum RVR || Decision Height (DH)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat I || 550 meters or visibility 800 meters || 200ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat II ||  300 meters || 100ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIa || 200 meters || 100 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIb || 75 - 50 meters || 50 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIc || keine RVR Begrenzung|| nil&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: Vertical Visibility ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical visibility is given in ft AGL. For LVP only BKN, OVC or VV are relevant. The latter being general vertical visibility with sufficient reduction of visibility not based on a specific cloud type. The values given in the metar are rounded down to the lowest 100ft value. OVC002 therefore means OVC between &amp;gt;200 and ≤300.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, in real life only RVR is considered in the decision making process whether LVP is being activated or not. This does not apply to VATSIM operations due to various factors, including but not limited to the depiction of visibility in various simulator-weather-addons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/ac/data/dokumente/LO_Circ_2020_A_15_en_2020-10-30_1110129.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Decision Making Process (LOWW) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to determine whether ot not LVP has to be used, two factors have to be considered: Ceiling (lowest OVC or BKN cloud layer or vertical visibility) and RVR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exact criteria refer to [[#LVP Criteria For Airports|LVP Criteria For Airports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots need to be informed about the activity of LVP. To do this, add „&amp;amp;lvp“ at the end of the Uniatis-String. This will result in the following text to be recieved by the pilots:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOW VISIBILITY PROCEDURES IN '''OPERATION'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Landing Clearance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During LVP Landing Clearances should be given:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Arriving A/C 2 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In exceptional circumstances at 1 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note: They &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; be given - this is not a requirement per se, but rather considered as guidance for the ATCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sequencing On Final ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lower visibilities require enlarged separation minima on final depending on the actual conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT II radar separation on final: 4nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT III radar separation on final: 6nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Considerations For Takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*During '''LVP Stage 2 or 3''', departing TFC should be cleared for takeoff before the next inbound for the same runway is closer that '''6nm from threshold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''As soon as the METAR indicates an RVR value e.g: R16/P1500N you are required to transmit this value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real life the controller will be provided with 3 RVR values: Touchdown Zone, Mid-Point, Stop-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Takeoff Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA94, RVR 550, 650, and 800 meters, wind 250 degrees 6 knots, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RVR Above maximum measurable value (1500m)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R16/'''P'''1500N &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 16 Cleared for takeoff&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The words &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; are induced by the preceeding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; which indicates an RVR value '''ABOVE''' 1500m. (It is not possible to measure an RVR greater than 1500m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VATSIM vs. Real Life'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the VATSIM METAR only provides one RVR Value (Touchdown Zone RVR) you may choose to add the remaining two values at your discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA26, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters RWY 16 Cleared to land. &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that only dictating value is indicated in the METAR string - It defines the Touchdown Zone RVR, and thus should be used as a reference when applying the above mentioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same applies to Takeoff Clearances:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No distinction is being made upon clearing an aircraft for an ILS approach in regard to the LVP-stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LVP Criteria For Airports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWW ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 16 &amp;amp; 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWL ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runway: 26. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWK ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway 28R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization from authority (MA-climb 4,7%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 800m or more '''AND''' ceiling 300 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 800m '''OR''' ceiling less than 300 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II or CAT III runways: none. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No explicit procedures for arriving traffic are published. Use best judgement and consider minima-values published on approach plates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also check further information in the [[LOWI_Primer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWG ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 35C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway: 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization (see special chart)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility and RVR 1500m or more '''AND''' ceiling 600 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility or RVR less than 1500m '''OR''' ceiling less than 600 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Procedures]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4394</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Low_Visibility_Procedures&amp;diff=4394"/>
		<updated>2021-02-20T11:18:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Phraseology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	Low visibility procedures exist to support Low Visibility Operations at Aerodromes when either surface visibility is sufficiently low to prejudice safe ground movement without additional procedural controls or the prevailing cloud base is sufficiently low to preclude pilots obtaining the required visual reference to continue to landing at the equivalent of an ILS Cat 1 DH/DA. [[https://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/Low_Visibility_Procedures_(LVP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: RVR/CAT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR = Runway Visual Range (Landebahnsicht)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RVR is being measured at three points along the runway: &amp;quot;Touchdown Zone&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Mid Point&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Stop End&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ILS-Category|| Minimum RVR || Decision Height (DH)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat I || 550 meters or visibility 800 meters || 200ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat II ||  300 meters || 100ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIa || 200 meters || 100 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIb || 75 - 50 meters || 50 - 0ft&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cat IIIc || keine RVR Begrenzung|| nil&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Terminology: Vertical Visibility ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical visibility is given in ft AGL. For LVP only BKN, OVC or VV are relevant. The latter being general vertical visibility with sufficient reduction of visibility not based on a specific cloud type. The values given in the metar are rounded down to the lowest 100ft value. OVC002 therefore means OVC between &amp;gt;200 and ≤300.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, in real life only RVR is considered in the decision making process whether LVP is being activated or not. This does not apply to VATSIM operations due to various factors, including but not limited to the depiction of visibility in various simulator-weather-addons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/ac/data/dokumente/LO_Circ_2020_A_15_en_2020-10-30_1110129.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Decision Making Process (LOWW) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to determine whether ot not LVP has to be used, two factors have to be considered: Ceiling (lowest OVC or BKN cloud layer or vertical visibility) and RVR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exact criteria refer to [[#LVP Criteria For Airports|LVP Criteria For Airports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots need to be informed about the activity of LVP. To do this, add „&amp;amp;lvp“ at the end of the Uniatis-String. This will result in the following text to be recieved by the pilots:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOW VISIBILITY PROCEDURES IN OPERATION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Landing Clearance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During LVP Landing Clearances should be given:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Arriving A/C 2 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In exceptional circumstances at 1 NM Final'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note: They &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; be given - this is not a requirement per se, but rather considered as guidance for the ATCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sequencing On Final ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lower visibilities require enlarged separation minima on final depending on the actual conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT II radar separation on final: 4nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''CAT III radar separation on final: 6nm'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Considerations For Takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*During '''LVP Stage 2 or 3''', departing TFC should be cleared for takeoff before the next inbound for the same runway is closer that '''6nm from threshold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''As soon as the METAR indicates an RVR value e.g: R16/P1500N you are required to transmit this value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real life the controller will be provided with 3 RVR values: Touchdown Zone, Mid-Point, Stop-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Takeoff Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA94, RVR 550, 650, and 800 meters, wind 250 degrees 6 knots, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RVR Above maximum measurable value (1500m)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R16/'''P'''1500N &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 16 Cleared for takeoff&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The words &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; are induced by the preceeding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; which indicates an RVR value '''ABOVE''' 1500m. (It is not possible to measure an RVR greater than 1500m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VATSIM vs. Real Life'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the VATSIM METAR only provides one RVR Value (Touchdown Zone RVR) you may choose to add the remaining two values at your discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA26, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters RWY 16 Cleared to land. &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that only dictating value is indicated in the METAR string - It defines the Touchdown Zone RVR, and thus should be used as a reference when applying the above mentioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same applies to Takeoff Clearances:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR 550, 500 and 650 Meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA25, 250 deg 6 kts, RVR above 1500 meters, RWY 29 cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No distinction is being made upon clearing an aircraft for an ILS approach in regard to the LVP-stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LVP Criteria For Airports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWW ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 16 &amp;amp; 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWL ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runway: 26. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWK ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway 28R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization from authority (MA-climb 4,7%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 800m or more '''AND''' ceiling 300 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 800m '''OR''' ceiling less than 300 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II or CAT III runways: none. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No explicit procedures for arriving traffic are published. Use best judgement and consider minima-values published on approach plates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also check further information in the [[LOWI_Primer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWG ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT III runways: 35C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR 600m or more '''AND''' ceiling 200 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT II (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
RVR less than 600m '''OR''' ceiling less than 200 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
LVP CAT II conditions prevail '''AND''' RVR less than 350m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOWS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Available CAT II runway: 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CAT III requires authorization (see special chart)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NO LVP or CAT I ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility and RVR 1500m or more '''AND''' ceiling 600 feet or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LVP CAT III (LVP Stage 3) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Visibility or RVR less than 1500m '''OR''' ceiling less than 600 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Procedures]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4393</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4393"/>
		<updated>2021-02-19T11:20:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot; */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give a takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway separation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the Proceedings aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the Control Zone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224: Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR: AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land at your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289: Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR Traffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve genehmigt.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave Control Zone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Squawk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Basic_Lesson&amp;diff=4392</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Basic Lesson</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Basic_Lesson&amp;diff=4392"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:29:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Rules &amp;amp; Regulations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:OBS]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= What is VATSIM? =&lt;br /&gt;
VATSIM (short for: Virtual Air Traffic Simulation Network) is a worldwide private non-profit association to organize virtual air traffic. You can find more information about VATSIM at http://www.vatsim.net.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a regional structure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 VATSIM Global&lt;br /&gt;
   - VATEUR (consists of VATEUD, VATUK, VATRUS)&lt;br /&gt;
     - VATEUR is split in three Divisions :&lt;br /&gt;
       - VATEUD (32 European VACC's)&lt;br /&gt;
         '''- VACC Austria'''&lt;br /&gt;
       - VATUK  (Includes only the United Kingdom and it is split in UK's 3 FIR's)&lt;br /&gt;
       - VATRUS (Includes Russias 12 FIR's and VACC Ukraine)&lt;br /&gt;
       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== As Real As It Gets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VATSIM has a motto: &amp;quot;As real as it gets&amp;quot;: We use professional charts, issued by our real counterparts, the ATC for real world traffic. We use their procedures - just a few simplifications, because we are virtual. We even use (most of) their FIR, air traffic boundaries and frequencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots are free and welcome to fly in the VATSIM network - the more, the more fun we have. They can flock up in virtual airlines, fly alone, as they like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for controllers, things are a bit different, because controlling air traffic &amp;quot;as real as it gets&amp;quot; requires learning and training. And - it is great fun too! Therefore, there is a &amp;quot;career&amp;quot; (S1-&amp;gt;S2-&amp;gt;S3-&amp;gt;C1-&amp;gt;...), there are stations you are allowed to staff (DEL, GND, APP, ...), there are even tests (ATSimTest, CPT, OTS). On the other hand: You are welcome in a community of fellow controllers who meet and have fun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Preparation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Training Department welcomes you to the virtual ATC world of VATSIM. Once you have decided to join, this is your way towards Center Control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your training contains several theoretical and practical lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Software ==&lt;br /&gt;
see [https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Euroscope Study Guide:Euroscope]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rules &amp;amp; Regulations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sure, the priority of our hobby is having fun. But don´t forget we want to provide professional service to our pilots and this contains a handful of rules which we don´t have to ignore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CoC: [http://www.vatsim.net/network/docs/coc/ Code of Conduct]. This regulation is valid for everyone on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally every VACC has Rules&amp;amp;Regulations regarding internal topics. Have a look into our [http://www.vacc-austria.org//index.php?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=RULES Rules and Regulations].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gentlemens' Agreement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not everything is written down in a document. The VACC-Austria stands for an excellent relationship among ourselves, courtesy and their reliabilty. If you want to receive these qualities, give it to each other. There is a Gentlemen's agreement: If you are unsure what the code of conduct says, then you might agree to being a gentleman :-)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Booking your station ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to control on a specific date and time, you have to book your station on our homepage. Choose your station and the time you want to make ATC. If you´ve booked your station, everyone (especially the pilots) will see when they can expect ATC service and plan their flight to or from your station. If you won´t be able to control at your booked time, please delete your booking. It is not nice if pilots fly to the airport according to your booking and no ATC is online. Another point is: Please be online for the whole booked time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teamspeak during your ATC session ==&lt;br /&gt;
Being online on teamspeak while being online at VATSIM is highly recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
* As OBS, you are welcome to join any channel with active ATCs. Please respect privacy in the meeting channels, and ask for permission if you join training lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
* As controller, it is highly recommended to be online at teamspeak and to join the channel you need to communicate with other ATC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Your first basic lesson =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Berfore your first basic lesson it is required to install the software written above. Be on time to your lesson to avoid delay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Documents =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a PPT presentation for the basic lesson:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/ATC-Trainings_Department/Projekt/Trainingsunterlagen/Basic%20Lesson.ppt Basic Lesson Powerpoint]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Intro&amp;diff=4391</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Intro</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Intro&amp;diff=4391"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:25:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Kontrollfragen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;amp;lt;-- [http://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Übersicht Übersicht]&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; Einstieg --&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Einführung  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Inhaltsangabe: '''Du lernst, wozu es Fluglotsen gibt - was Dein&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot;Job&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;ist, die Grundmodelle, wie dieser Job ausgeführt wird, und wie Fluglotsen im (virtuellen und realen)&amp;amp;nbsp;Raum organisiert sind.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Was kannst Du danach? '''Du weißt, in welche &amp;quot;Welt&amp;quot; Du Dich begibst, wie Controller organisiert sind, und was sie tun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Lerninhalt:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Controllen auf VATSIM - was hat das mit der Realität zu tun?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sehr viel. VASIM ist &amp;quot;as real as it gets&amp;quot;.&amp;amp;nbsp;Wir benützen daher - soweit praktikabel - die realen Prozeduren der realen Fluglotsen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wozu ist der Fluglotse da?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In der realen Welt sind zu jeder Zeit (grob geschätzt) 10-20.000 Flugzeuge gleichzeitig in der Luft. Diese Flugzeuge konzentrieren sich in relativ wenigen Regionen (insbesondre USA&amp;amp;nbsp;und Europa), und dort konzentrieren sie sich nocheinmal stärker rund um die großen Flughäfen, zum Beispiel London Heathrow, Frankfurt, München.&amp;amp;nbsp;Sieh Dir eine Abflugtafel von Frankfurt an: Alle 2-3 Minuten fliegt hier ein Flieger weg. Plus jene, die ankommen, plus die Cargo-Flieger, und die privaten Maschinen - es braucht Leute, die das &amp;quot;ordnen&amp;quot;. '''Fluglotsen.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Der Job eines Fluglotsen ist dreierlei: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Separation - das Verhindern von Zusammenstößen. Er ist dazu da, dass Flieger nicht zusammenkrachen. Wenn das nicht funktioniert, dann passiert [http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Flugzeugkollision_von_%C3%9Cberlingen sowas]. &lt;br /&gt;
#Verkehrsfluss - dass die Flieger ohne große Schleifen und Umwege hin und weg kommen &lt;br /&gt;
#Information - dass die Flieger gut, schnell und heil ankommen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Zwei Methoden:&amp;amp;nbsp;VFR und IFR&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus der Geschichte des Fliegens heraus sind zwei verschiedene Methoden entstanden, wie Fluglotsen das machen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''VFR ([http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sichtflug Visual Flight Rules])''': Der Pilot ist selbst verantwortlich dafür, dass er mit nichts und niemandem kollidiert. Der Fluglotse unterstützt ihn dabei, indem er ihm ''Informationen'' liefert, ihm bestimmte Dinge ''erlaubt'' und ''verbietet''. Was der Pilot dann tut, ist sein&amp;amp;nbsp;Problem.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Tower: OE-ABW, Verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S genehmigt, 1500 Fuß oder darunter, QNH&amp;amp;nbsp;1033, Wind 320° 6 Knoten, Piste 29 Start frei.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Der Fluglotse im&amp;amp;nbsp;Tower erlaubt dem Flieger, seine Zone über eine bestimmte Route zu verlassen (wenn der Pilot etwas anderes will, muss er das sagen), wie hoch er fliegen darf (1500ft - der Pilot darf auch tiefer fliegen), er gibt ihm Informationen (Luftdruck, Windrichtung und Windstärke), und er erlaubt ihm den Start. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''IFR ([http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrumentenflug Instrument Flight Rules]): '''Das geht nicht für alle Flieger und nicht alle Fluggebiete. So ist eine Verkehrsmaschine wie eine [http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boeing_737 B737] zu groß und zu schnell. Der Pilot sieht zuwenig von seiner Umgebung, und außerdem:&amp;amp;nbsp;Die Passagiere hinten drin haben gezahlt, dafür dass sie ankommen, auch wenn es z.B. Wolken und Nebel gibt, in denen der Pilot rein garnichts sieht. Außerdem gibt es Flughäfen, auf denen es so zugeht, dass es verboten ist, dass ein Pilot selbst wählt, was er tut. Der Fluglotse unterstützt diese Flieger, indem er ihnen ''anweist, was sie tun sollen.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;APP: Speedbird 123, turn left 320° descend 4000ft, QNH&amp;amp;nbsp;1033&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Der Fluglotse weist den Piloten etwas an:&amp;amp;nbsp;Links drehen auf 320°, auf 4000 Fuß sinken. Er gibt Informationen, die der Flieger für die Anweisung braucht:&amp;amp;nbsp;Den lokalen Luftdruck. Wenn der Pilot aus egal welchen Gründen dieser Anweisung nicht folgen kann, muss er diese Anweisung ablehnen. Der Controller muss auf die Ablehnung reagieren und dem Piloten etwas anderes anweisen.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aus VFR&amp;amp;nbsp;und IFR folgt folgendes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Der Pilot sucht sich aus, ob er IFR&amp;amp;nbsp;oder VFR&amp;amp;nbsp;fliegt. Es gibt eine Menge Regeln, was er dazu können (Lizenz) und haben (Flugzeugequipment) muss, sowie wo und wann er das darf.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*Der Controller tut beides zugleich:&amp;amp;nbsp;Der VFR-Flieger bekommt VFR-Genehmigungen und -Informationen, der IFR-Flieger bekommt IFR-Anweisungen und -informationen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Luft ist nicht Luft:&amp;amp;nbsp;Der Airspace  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Damit es mit zehntausenden Fliegern in der Luft nicht kracht, gibt es verschiedene Lufträume. Die Lufträume haben Buchstaben. Die Deutsche Flugsicherung hat eine schöne [http://www.dfs.de/dfs/internet_2008/module/grundkurs_flugsicherung/englisch/atc_basics/air_navigation_services/airspace_info_and_structure/index.html Grafik] dafür. Die [http://www.austrocontrol.at/en/content/atm/AIS/Products/kml/kml.shtml Austrocontrol] hat eine Datei, die mit Google Earth anzusehen ist. Verschiedene Lufträume ... &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*haben verschiedene Regeln - was du darfst, was du nicht darfst, was du musst.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*haben verschiedene Controller - jeder Controller ist für sein &amp;quot;Stück&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;Luft zuständig.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mehr zu Lufträumen gibts dann in den &amp;quot;Dingen zu Beginn&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Von Gate zu Gate:&amp;amp;nbsp;Controller begleiten die Piloten&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Controller sind so organisiert, dass sie einen Flieger auf seiner ganzen Reise begleiten - vom Gate zum&amp;amp;nbsp;Gate praktisch. Aber es gibt einen Unterschied zwischen VFR&amp;amp;nbsp;und IFR:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR-Flieger werden nur im kontrolliertem Luftraum begleitet. Alle etwas größeren Flughäfen (in Österreich LOWI, LOWS, LOWL, LOWK, LOWG&amp;amp;nbsp;und LOWW) sind kontrollierter Luftraum. VFR-Flieger werden also von der Parkposition weg begleitet, bis sie den kontrollierten Luftraum verlassen. Wenn sie wieder in kontrollierten Luftraum einfliegen, melden sie sich, bekommen den Einflug genehmigt, und bleiben &amp;quot;unter Kuratel&amp;quot; bis zur Parkposition.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*Kleine Flughäfen haben keinen kontrollierten Luftraum. Dort ist der Controller eine Informationsstelle. Er sagt dem Flieger, wo Verkehr ist, wie Wind und Luftdruck ist, und dann soll der Pilot im eigenen Ermessen handeln. &lt;br /&gt;
*IFR-Flieger ''fliegen'' nur in kontrolliertem Luftraum. Sie werden &amp;quot;von der Wiege bis zur Bahre&amp;quot; begleitet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Für einen IFR-Flug sehen die verschiedenen Stadien des Flugs so aus:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Flugplan:&amp;amp;nbsp;Ein IFR-Flieger muss vorher anmelden, von wo nach wo er/sie fliegt, und zwar genau die Route (Näheres dazu später). Dieser Flugplan wird dann &amp;quot;gecleared&amp;quot;, also genehmigt. Mit der Information des Clearings kann der Pilot seinen Bordcomputer programmieren und die Maschine fertig machen zum Start. Im Flugplan ist angegeben, über welche großen überregionalen Flugrouten die Reise geht.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Rollen:&amp;amp;nbsp;Wenn der Vogel nicht ein Hubschrauber ist, muss er ja irgendwie auf die Startbahn. Er lässt seine Maschinen an, lässt sich (wenn er am Gate steht) zurückschieben und rollt über die taxiways an (nicht auf!) die Rollbahn.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Takeoff:&amp;amp;nbsp;Er muss mal abheben.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#SID: Vom Flughafen bis zur Flugroute ists ein weiter Weg - sowohl hinauf als auch weg. Diese &amp;quot;Autobahnauffahrt&amp;quot; heißt SID (Standard Instrument Departure). Sie führt die Flieger konfliktfrei (zu landenden Fliegern nämlich) weg vom Flughafen in die Reiseflughöhe und die Flugroute.&amp;amp;nbsp;Warum ist die SID&amp;amp;nbsp;so wichtig?&amp;amp;nbsp;Weil es für jede Landebahn und jeden Endpunkt auf der Flugroute eine eigene SID&amp;amp;nbsp;gibt - und die kann oft von einer Minute auf die andere wechseln, wenn der Wind dreht und der Flughafen die Startbahn wechselt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Airway: Die Flugrouten sind die lange Reise &amp;quot;ganz oben&amp;quot;. Sie führen von Wegpunkt zu Wegpunkt. Meistens fliegt hier der Autopilot, und der reale Pilot isst und trinkt etwas von der Bordküche.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#STAR: Die SID&amp;amp;nbsp;braucht ein Gegenstück - wie kommt der Flieger von der Airway heil in die Nähe des Flughafens? Diese Route heisst &amp;quot;STAR&amp;quot; nach STandard ARrival Route.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Transition:&amp;amp;nbsp;Es kann sein, dass der Wind dreht, und dann wird die Landebahn gewechselt. So muss also jeder Flieger von jedem Endpunkt seiner STAR auf jede Landebahn finden. Das ist die &amp;quot;transition&amp;quot;. Die verschiedenen Transitions von den STARs laufen alle auf die Landebahn(en) zusammen. Dort werden die verschiedenen Flieger aus den verschiedenen Richtungen &amp;quot;aufgefädelt&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Landung:&amp;amp;nbsp;Die letzten 10 Meilen und das Aufsetzen auf der Landebahn.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Taxi:&amp;amp;nbsp;Die Leute wollen raus, und dazu muss der Flieger ans Gate oder an die Parkposition.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt; GRAFIK EINFÜGEN SID EDDM und STAR-TR LOWW &amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Verschiedene Controller für verschiedene Phasen&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Controller sind wie der Luftraum auch in einem Schichtmodell hierarchisch geordnet, und genau in dieser Reihenfolge wirst Du sie auch lernen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delivery (DEL) ist die unterste &amp;quot;Schicht&amp;quot;. Der/die Delivery-Controller sitzt am Flughafen und genehmigt den abfliegenden PilotInnen den Flugplan. Oft wird dieser Job als die &amp;quot;Dodelarbeit&amp;quot; bezeichnet. Er ist allerdings wichtig, wenn es am Flughafen sehr zugeht, und er ist sehr nützlich für den Anfang als Controller.&amp;amp;nbsp;Du lernst Kommunikation (mit PilotInnen und den anderen Controllern &amp;quot;über dir&amp;quot;) und Flugregeln.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground bzw. Bodenkontrolle (GND) ist die nächste &amp;quot;Schicht&amp;quot;. Der/die Ground Controller ist zuständig für alles, was am Flughafen rollt. Er/sie bekommt die Flieger von DEL&amp;amp;nbsp;übergeben, wenn sie die Maschinen starten und zur Startbahn rollen können.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower bzw. Turm (TWR) ist die dritte &amp;quot;Schicht&amp;quot;: Nur der Tower lässt Flieger auf die Piste (das gilt für ankommende und abgehende Flieger).&amp;amp;nbsp;Er ist zuständig dafür, dass sie sicher abheben und aufsetzen. Der Tower muss schon in die Luft gucken. DEL, GND und TWR sitzen übrigens in Wirklichkeit physisch im selben Raum, und zwar auf der Aussichtsebene des Turms. Die drei müssen nämlich rausgucken können.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Approach (APP) ist die nächste &amp;quot;Schicht&amp;quot;. Der/die APP-Controller ist dafür zuständig, die Flugzeuge vom Flughafen weg auf ihre Flugroute zu bringen - den SID. Auf VATSIM&amp;amp;nbsp;ist bei viel Verkehr dieser Bereich manchmal zwischen verschiedenen Controllern aufgeteilt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#Center (CTR) ist die oberste &amp;quot;Schicht&amp;quot;. Der/die CTR-Controller lotst den Flieger auf Reiseflughöhe, sorgt dafür, dass sie sich nicht &amp;quot;auffressen&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;(schnellerer hinter langsamerem Flieger), und übergibt die PilotInnen an benachbarte CTR-Controller, wenn sie Grenzen überfliegen. Auf VATSIM ist bei viel Verkehr dieser Bereich manchmal zwischen verschiedenen Controllern aufgeteilt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#APP&amp;amp;nbsp;übernimmt den Flieger wieder von CTR, lässt den Flieger sinken und bringt ihn an den Flughafen heran. Er fädelt die Flieger auf die Transition auf für den Landevorgang.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#In den letzten Meilen vor der Landebahn wird es besonders eng, denn dort kommen alle Flieger von allen STARs zusammen. Deswegen gibt es bei viel Frequenz noch einen Controller, den DIRector. Er staffelt die aufgefädelten Maschinen, so dass sie Minimalabstand behalten und sich nicht zu nahe kommen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#TWR übernimmt von DIR und gibt die Landefreigabe. &lt;br /&gt;
#Wenn der Flieger von der Landebahn runter ist, gibt ihm GND die &amp;quot;taxi clearance&amp;quot;:&amp;amp;nbsp;Wohin er rollen soll und über welche Strecke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weil VATSIM ein&amp;amp;nbsp;Hobby ist, sind aber nicht immer alle Stationen besetzt (meist nur bei einem fully staffed event wie z.B.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;). Dafür gibt es zwei Regeln: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Der obere Controller nimmt den unteren Controller mit:&amp;amp;nbsp;Wenn also LOWW_APP besetzt ist, aber TWR nicht, dann gibt APP die Landefreigabe auch. &lt;br /&gt;
#Wenn der obere Controller fehlt, dann liegt es am Piloten selbst, was er tut:&amp;amp;nbsp;Er wechselt auf eine dafür vorgesehene Frequenz (UNICOM, 122.80) und schreibt dort als Textnachricht, was er tut, damit ihm keine/r reinfliegt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Daraus ergibt sich die Reihenfolge, in der Du controllen lernen wirst:&amp;amp;nbsp;DEL, GND, TWR, APP, CTR. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Web-Ressourcen  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Youtube: [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TLnGyW--NZg IFR-Fug von Worms nach Maastricht]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dieser Abschnitt enthielt...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*wozu Controller da sind und was sie tun &lt;br /&gt;
*was IFR und VFR ist &lt;br /&gt;
*wie Controller &amp;quot;geschichtet&amp;quot; sind und welche Phasen eines Flugs bzw. welchen Airspace sie begleiten.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4390</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4390"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:18:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR Flights ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mode-S SQ7000===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4389</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4389"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:17:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* MODE-S SQ7000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= VFR Flights =&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mode-S SQ7000===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4388</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4388"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:16:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Squawk 7000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= VFR Flights =&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MODE-S SQ7000===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4387</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4387"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:15:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= VFR Flights =&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Squawk 7000===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4386</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4386"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:12:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* VFR flight plans */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR Flights ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4385</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4385"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:10:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Vertical Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MUERZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the appropriate entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4384</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4384"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:08:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Flightplan Structure */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4383</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4383"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:06:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* High Traffic Situation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4382</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4382"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:06:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* High Traffic Situation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Add 2 mins for each waiting aircraft.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4381</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4381"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:03:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Behavior in situations with increased traffic */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== High Traffic Situation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4380</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4380"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T01:01:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Issue IFR Routing Clearances */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RTE Clearance  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4379</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4379"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:56:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR Assignment + Initial Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4378</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4378"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:56:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Working Delivery Positions  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Flightplan Structure  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lateral Plan Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vertical Syntax==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for DEL controllers =&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ATIS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IFR flight plans==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SSR assignment + Initia Climb ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-routing of traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handover===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VFR flight plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4377</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4377"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:44:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Start and Push clearance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Start and Push clearance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4376</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4376"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:43:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Taxiway configurations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4375</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4375"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:41:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Special Case Northern F stands */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4374</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4374"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:41:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Helicopters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4373</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4373"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:40:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4372</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4372"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:40:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4371</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4371"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:39:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground =&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Taxiways =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxi Instructions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4370</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4370"/>
		<updated>2021-02-18T00:37:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ground ==&lt;br /&gt;
(see the ground chart [[https://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW which you find here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has three piers with gates and some stands around. From West to East, there are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation West is all the way to the West at Taxiways Q and P.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some stands at the maintainance area (A91 to A99)&lt;br /&gt;
* General Aviation East is near EX13.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two rarely used stands (B52 and B62) are next&lt;br /&gt;
* Near EX12, there are three rows for small commercial airliners B71 to B92).&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier West (gates C31 to C42) and Pier East (D21 to D29) are next. They all match M aircraft, with the corner stands C36, C39, D23, D26 and D28) for H aircraft too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pier North or Terminal 3 (&amp;quot;Skylink&amp;quot;) is relatively new (and most likely the most expensive pier after BER airport *irony*), providing gates to the South (F01-F37, odd numbers) and the North F04-F36, even numbers).&lt;br /&gt;
Besides to the East, there are stands for large aircraft - currently the only places for the A380.&lt;br /&gt;
* South of Pier North are stands for smaller and budget airliners (the E stands).&lt;br /&gt;
* North of Pier North is another row for the same (the H stands).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiways ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Two parallel taxiways (L and M) run along runway 11/29. Caution: Taxiway L after EX12 is narrower and cannot be used for M and H aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
* Runway 16/34 have another two taxiways: D and E. D is somehow shorter, E goes through all the way.&lt;br /&gt;
* An extra taxiway (W) leads from EX2 to EX21.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then there are some taxilanes to access Pier North (TL35, 36 and 37 to the South of the pier, TL40 to the North). TL40 has a blue (south) and an orange (north) variant, which not all sceneries have, so be aware if pilots can see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#coordinate RWY config with TWR.&lt;br /&gt;
#choose a taxiway configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is ground's responsibility to direct and monitor ground movements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may clear an aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingtip clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Taxiway configurations=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a Noise Abatement procedure after 21:00 local time, which changes runways to 29-only, if wind permits. SIDs after 21:00 might change. Tower changes runways, so expect to be notified of the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* VFR traffic does not necessarily depart or land from the runway in use - enquire from TWR, what to clear, and if TWR or DEL clears. Most likely you will clear him (set the runway in Euroscope) and hand him over to ground as any other IFR flight. Enter the exit route into the flight plan or the text field in the tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-only ==&lt;br /&gt;
With strong westerly wind and after 21:00 local, 29-only is the option. This the option for minimizing conflicts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29only.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
When wind is Northwesterly, then departing 29 and arriving 34 is an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may even be departures from 34 in this ground flow configuration. Traffic flow could be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 11-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has a local procedure to have quasi-parallel operation of runway 11 and 16. In this configuration, aircraft depart from 16. Arrivals are 11 and 16 depending on traffic and aircraft class (Heavies cannot approach 11 if 16 is open, as go-around paths would cross). Taxiing is somehow complex in this situation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could handle the flow like this, which will turn L and M to left-around to minimise conflicts. There is a hot spot at EX23, where outbound and inbound traffic cross. However, departing traffic will be able to see departing on their right hand side, so you can work with conditional clearances (&amp;quot;give way to crossing traffic from D at Exit 23&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxiing with 29-16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the wind is low, but southerly, then 29-16 is a good option. This is how you can handle it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:29-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ground Traffic Management =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Special Case Northern F stands=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helicopters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Slots  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opposite runway operations  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4369</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4369"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:46:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working Delivery Positions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flightplan Structure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flight Plan Syntax ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vertical Syntax'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Workflow for DEL controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Check the flight Plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flight plans, ...'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Re-routing of traffic'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VFR flight plans'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Coordinate with tower&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Squawk and initial clearance altitude ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5. Handover ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR flight plans ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slots  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== More Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4368</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4368"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:42:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Flight Plan Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working Delivery Positions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flightplan Structure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flight Plan Syntax ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools and paste the code into the routing field. The format is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;via&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the same airway are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA NAPSA3A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI are enroute waypoints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is an airway.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;Direct&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vertical Syntax'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Workflow for DEL controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Check the flight Plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flight plans, ...'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Re-routing of traffic'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VFR flight plans'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Coordinate with tower&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Squawk and initial clearance altitude ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5. Handover ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR flight plans ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slots  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== More Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4367</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4367"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:38:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Flight Plan Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working Delivery Positions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flightplan Structure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flight Plan Syntax ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools (like [http://www.vatroute.net www.vatroute.net]) and paste the code into the routing field. The form is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;route&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;route&amp;gt;&amp;lt;destination&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the route are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point (where the aircraft leaves the SID.&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI BAGSI MATIG AMADI are enroute waypoints&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is the route to the STAR entry point for EDDM.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;DireCT&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vertical Syntax'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Workflow for DEL controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Check the flight Plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flight plans, ...'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Re-routing of traffic'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VFR flight plans'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Coordinate with tower&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Squawk and initial clearance altitude ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5. Handover ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR flight plans ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slots  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== More Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4366</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Delivery</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Delivery&amp;diff=4366"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:38:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' &amp;lt;-- Back: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next--&amp;gt; [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide has been designed to give you all the information needed to start controlling as a Clearance/Delivery controller on the VATSIM network. It assumes, that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before and have logged in as observer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working Delivery Positions  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clearance Delivery is responsible for checking and correcting flightplans of departing aircraft and issue routing clearances to them. This task may sound boring, but is important for upstream controllers: Clearances take time (on the radio) and may block vital commands (like takeoff and landing clearances), and radar stations rely on the checked and cleared values (SIDs and clearance altitudes) for their controlling. If DEL makes mistakes, APP will have trouble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of flight plans at VATSIM:&lt;br /&gt;
*IFR: Any pilot who flies IFR must file a flight plan. It contains the exact routing from departure to arrival, cruise altitude and some more information which controllers need for their job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*VFR: VFR pilots can file flight plans, but they don't need to. They can simply ask for taxi clearance, take off and continue in uncontrolled airspace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flightplan Structure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flight plans''' are documents filed by pilots with the local Civil Aviation Authority prior to departure. They generally include basic information such as departure and arrival points, estimated time en route, alternate airports in case of bad weather, type of flight (whether instrument flight rules or visual flight rules), pilot's name and number of people on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At VATSIM, flight plans are filed with a VATSIM server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flights''', flight plans are used by air traffic control to initiate tracking and routing services. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft routing types used in IFR flight plans are: Airway, Navaid and Direct. A route may be composed of segments of different routing types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Airway:''' Airway routing occurs along pre-defined pathways called Airways. Mostly aircraft are required to fly airways between the departure and destination airports. The rules cover altitude, airspeed, and requirements for entering and leaving the airway (SIDs and STARs). Airways have letters and numbers like &amp;quot;Y868 or &amp;quot;UM125&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Navaid:''' Navaid routing occurs between Navaids (short for Navigational Aids) which are not always connected by airways. Navaid flight plans are used for IFR aircraft which don't have a GPS receiver - they can't follow waypoints. Navaid routing is typically only allowed in the continental U.S. If a flight plan specifies Navaid routing between two Navaids which are connected via an airway, the rules for that particular airway must be followed as if the aircraft was flying Airway routing between those two Navaids. Allowable altitudes are covered in Flight Levels. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Direct:''' Direct routings are becoming more and more common as FRA (Free Route Airspace) is under ongoing development in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For VFR flights''', the only purpose is to provide needed information should search and rescue operations be required. At VATSIM, a VFR flight plan is handy for controllers, as it shows vital information with the airplane tag on the radar, like the destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flight Plan Syntax ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for IFR flight plans''' is quite strict, and pilots are encouraged to look up flight plans via online tools (like [http://www.vatroute.net www.vatroute.net]) and paste the code into the routing field. The form is usually &amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;route&amp;gt;&amp;lt;waypoint&amp;gt;&amp;lt;route&amp;gt;&amp;lt;destination&amp;gt;, where every waypoint is noted, where the itinerary changes from one route to another (waypoints on the route are omitted). This is necessary, as radar clients (Euroscope) read and interpret this data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: A valid routing from LOWW to EDDM is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSI DCT MATIG DCT AMADI Q113 NAPSA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SOVIL is the SID exit point (where the aircraft leaves the SID. For more information on the SID, see https://vacc-austria.org/index.php?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW).&lt;br /&gt;
* SITNI BAGSI MATIG AMADI are enroute waypoints&lt;br /&gt;
* Q113 is the route to the STAR entry point for EDDM.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;DCT&amp;quot; in-between means that there is no airway between these points: they are &amp;quot;DireCT&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vertical Syntax'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So far we have specified the lateral dimension. To further specify the '''vertical aspects''' a speed and level segment has to be attached to the RTE string:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Format -&amp;gt; NxxxxFyyy or NxxxxAyyy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 i.e '''N0450F340'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''N0450''' indicates the planned TAS (True Airspeed)&lt;br /&gt;
*'''F340''' indicates the planned FL (Flightlevel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For flights which will remain in lower airspace i.e below the transition altitude the following is used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0120A080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A080''' indicates Altitude 8000ft (QNH)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; is used to attach such a speed and level group to a waypoint e.g:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''N0450F340''' OSPEN DCT ABRUK DCT SETAL DCT DETSA/'''N0450F350''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first group indicates the initial planned TAS and Level, the second group indicates a Level Change at DETSA to '''FL350'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Syntax for VFR flight plans''' is unregulated and should be self-explanatory (controllers read it themselves). A good code for a VFR flight from LOWW to LOWI might be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SIERRA SEMMERING MUR MÜRZ LOWZ GERLOS MIKE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sector S is the preferred VFR exit route from Vienna TMA&lt;br /&gt;
* The rest is a description of a popular route to Innsbruck through scenic mountains&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike ist the logical entry into LOWI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Workflow for DEL controllers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller (TWR, APP, CTR) for active runways and set active airport and runways in your Euroscope &amp;quot;active runways&amp;quot; dialogue box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check with the upstream controller the active ATIS letter. Set your ATIS dialog box to your airport and the active letter, but don't connect (ATIS is TWR's job). Set this way, Euroscope will show the valid ATIS letter in your METAR list and you don't need to ask every few minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
# If there is no Tower or upstream, then create an ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the active runways===&lt;br /&gt;
The guiding principle in choosing the active runways is that aircraft prefer to depart and land into the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
 An airport has one runway named 16/34. The wind is reported as 320 degrees at 14 knots. In &lt;br /&gt;
 this case runway 34 is chosen as the active runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at a more complicated example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW has two runways: 16/34 and 11/29.&lt;br /&gt;
 Suppose, wind is 020°, and you see: runway 34 is only 40° off, while 110 is 90° off --&amp;gt; runway 34 is the better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Beware: All major airports have preferential runway configurations which depend on approach configuration, noise abatement and terrain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, tailwind components of up to ten knots are accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However due to noise abatement and terrain considerations most airports have some kind of preferential runway system. &lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the pilots decision whether he can accept a certain runway because only he knows the performance of his aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details on the preferred runway configurations for a specific airport ask your mentor or look into the airport QRS (quick reference sheets). See in the Resources section at the very bottom for links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATIS  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS stands for Automatic Terminal Information Service and is a usually automatically generated broadcast that contains essential information for pilots. It is continuously broadcasted on a dedicated frequency. On initial contact with the controller, pilots should already have listened to the ATIS and state the identifying letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An ATIS broadcast consists of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Name of the Airport &lt;br /&gt;
*Identification Letter &lt;br /&gt;
*Time of Observation &lt;br /&gt;
*Active Runways &lt;br /&gt;
*Transition Level &lt;br /&gt;
*Wind direction and velocity &lt;br /&gt;
*Visibilities &lt;br /&gt;
*Special weather conditions (such as rain) &lt;br /&gt;
*Cloud ceiling &lt;br /&gt;
*Temperature and Dewpoint &lt;br /&gt;
*QNH &lt;br /&gt;
*Trends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is updated every 30 minutes or as soon as significant changes occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Check the flight Plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For IFR flight plans, ...'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if &amp;quot;From&amp;quot;-Airport is yours and &amp;quot;To&amp;quot;-Airport makes sense. It is unlikely that a C172 will fly to GATB (Timbuktu) without stopovers, as well as a B737 flies VFR to KJFK. If anything looks wrong, ask the pilot to confirm his details. Nevertheless, as soon as you modify the FPLN, the pilot won't be able to amend his own FPLN anymore. Reconnection is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if departure runway corresponds to the active runway. If not, then check your runway settings in Euroscope (Pilots never file a particular runway - it's Euroscope setting it for you).&lt;br /&gt;
* Check, if cruise altitude is correct: Cruise altitude is stated in flight levels (hundreds of feet): FL280 means 28000 feet (at QNH 1013, to be really correct). For flight levels below FL410, '''westbound flights have even flight levels''', and '''eastbound flights have odd flight levels.''' Above FL410, flight levels increase by 20: west is FL430-470-510-550 etc, east is 450-490-530-570 etc. If the filed ALT requires a change - change it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check, if there is a valid SID from the active runway to the first waypoint in the flight plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch out: &lt;br /&gt;
* At some airports (LOWI) there are more SIDs to the same waypoint, valid for different aircraft (usually, one is &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; and the other are &amp;quot;special departures&amp;quot; depending on aircraft performance and equipment).&lt;br /&gt;
* At most airports there are special SIDs for aircraft with no FMC (Non-RNAV departures.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Some airports have noise abatement procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope has already selected the first matching SID in the alphabet. Check, if this SID is applicable to the aircraft type, performance, equipment and time (you might want to check with APP to clarify, which SIDs are correct), and select the best SID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Re-routing of traffic'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a filed routing is invalid or the decision to revise an A/C routing has been made by you it can be difficult to communicate this change in RTE to the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
In an ideal world you would reroute an A/C before it calls you, thus avoiding unnecessary discussions on frequency. It is therefore suggestable to make use of private messages for this special case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *ATC FPL AMENDED* REVISED RTE: SOVIL DCT SITNI DCT BAGSU DCT MATIG DCT NANIT NANIT2A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By sending the message in this format you can reduce the likelihood of a possible discussion as it resembles an automatic message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to also amend the ATC FPL in Euroscope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''VFR flight plans'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Coordinate with tower&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Squawk and initial clearance altitude ===&lt;br /&gt;
*The squawk range is predefined for each airport and written in the sector file. For normal purposes, automatic squawk allocation in Euroscope works fine. In high traffic situations the squawk range might not be sufficient, and Euroscope indicates &amp;quot;DUPE&amp;quot; (for &amp;quot;duplicate squawk&amp;quot;). In this case, you have to set a new squawk.&lt;br /&gt;
* Since 2016, real-life technology has changed. The so-called &amp;quot;transponder mode S&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;S&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;selective&amp;quot;) allows aircraft to be linked with other means than the transponder code. Certain mode S aircraft receive squawk 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the initial climb altitude. This differs from airport to airport. LOWW has 5000ft for all SIDs (&amp;quot;A50&amp;quot; in the list), In LOWI, you have to check with APP (it's between FL120 and 160), and Salzburg has different altitudes for different SIDs (look into the SID description).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issue IFR Routing Clearances  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DEL gives routing clearances to all departing aircraft with the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* aircraft identification&lt;br /&gt;
* clearance limit (normally destination aerodrome / or last IFR waypoint)&lt;br /&gt;
* assigned SID&lt;br /&gt;
* initial climb&lt;br /&gt;
* allocated SSR code (squawk)&lt;br /&gt;
*''' QNH if false or no ATIS letter reported.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* any other necessary instructions e.g. instructions relating to change of frequency or CTOT (= Calculated take-off time) Slot time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normal construction of a routing clearance: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Callsign, cleared to XXXX via XXXXX XX departure, initial climb 5000ft, Squawk 46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, LUGEM 1C departure, 5000ft, SQ1000, Q1022.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traffic unable SID  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some Aircraft are not able to follow SIDs for various reasons, most of the time due to missing equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna is equipped with a NON-RNAV SID -&amp;gt; the SNU departures. Any IFR equipped aircraft is sufficiently equipped to fly this SID, even if it has no FMS. This is your safest bet if a pilot has an old AIRAC or is simply unable for anything else. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you issue such a clearance you will need to connect the SID, in our case SNU2C, to the filed RTE. First filed waypoint would be SITNI - this is issued as follows:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA43EM, cleared Zürich SNU2C departure, SITNI next, 5000ft, SQ 1000, Q1032&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally you can issue a so called vectored departure. A vectored departure clearance includes the same components as a normal clearance but instead of the SID you issue instructions to be carried out after departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, cleared XXXX, RWY XX, when airborn turn XXXX, climb 5000ft, SQ46XX, QNH XXXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, cleared Frankfurt, RWY29, when airborn turn left heading 200 , climb 5000 ft, SQ1000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot responds with a correct readback you should answer with the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, readback correct, report ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5. Handover ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving the ready call - you may handover to Ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, Ground 121,775 - Servus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done to keep the A/C on your Frequency until it is fully ready to move. By doing this DEL has the chance to communicate any RTE or Slot changes should they arise, thus reducing workload for the GND Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== IFR Flights Terminating at Waypoints or Uncontrolled Aerodromes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IFR Flight does not necessarily have to terminate at the destination Aerodrome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IFR Flights to Bad Voeslau (LOAV) or Wiener Neustadt (LOAN) for example terminate at a specified Fix:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MOVOS''' for LOAV arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
*'''GESGI''' for LOAN arrivals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clear the following flight with destination LOAV:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 N0110A050 SNU DCT MOVOS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the following phraseology is to be used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEFVR '''cleared to MOVOS''', SNU2C departure, 5000ft, SQ4601, Q1014&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As MOVOS is the clearance limit you may not clear an A/C any further. The flight is then expected to hold at MOVOS if not instructed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR flight plans ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Tower is responsible for VFR traffic. However, pilots have to contact DEL for clearance. You have to enquire with Tower about the details of the departure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- runway to expect (VFR is not bound to the active rwy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- route to expect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot should call you 10min before the flight for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 at General aviation center, request to leave control zone via sector S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Expect RWY 16, leave Control Zone via Sector S, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: leave via Sector Sierra, 1500ft or below, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Readback correct, contact Ground 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: C172 Abstellplatz der Allgemeinen Luftfahrt, erbitte Freigabe zum verlassen der Kontrollzone über Sektor S.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: OE-DLT Aktive Piste 16, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q 1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-DLT: Verlassen die Kontrollzone über Sektor Sierra, 1500ft oder darunter, Squawk 7000, Q1032.&lt;br /&gt;
 DEL: Korrekt, rufen Sie Wien Rollkontrolle 121.600Mhz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important Note''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Mode-S transponder are mandatory in Austria, using the VFR squawk 7000 exclusively is sufficient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the need for a different Squawk arise - use 0001-0020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slots  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to guarantee a safe flow of traffic and to minimize delays in the air so called slots are being used. A slot is a timeframe of five minutes before to ten minutes after the CTOT (Calculated Time Of Takeoff) mentioned before. The aircraft has to depart within this timeframe from its departure airport. On the VATSIM network this system is only used on special occasions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In real world the are always reserved Slots for the airliners. If they fail the slot time they must wait for a new. The reason is that you won't want too many aircraft in the air with no space to land. Responsible for Slot coordination is the CFMU called &amp;quot;Central Flow Management Unit&amp;quot; in Brussels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Behavior in situations with increased traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes one of your neighboring sectors has to stop accepting traffic. In these cases you should delay an aircrafts start-up clearance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If possible you should inform the pilot about the expected delay: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, expect startup in 15 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== More Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:OBS]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Ground]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4365</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4365"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:05:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land?&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot initiates contact by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien, Austrian 125, F05, request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop an A/C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Helicopters'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4364</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4364"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T23:02:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land?&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot initiates contact by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien, Austrian 125, F05, request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the traffic situation you can either clear the A/C directly to the RWY or issue an intermediate clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi via M hold before EXIT 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
The safest and primary way to achieve safe operations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, you might need to re-clear or stop aplane:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Helicopters'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4361</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4361"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T10:20:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Additional phrases during periods of high traffic */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give a takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway separation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the Proceedings aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the Control Zone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224: Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR: AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land at your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is standard practice in Vienna to issue landing clearance latest 1 NM Final. No special phraseology is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289: Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR Traffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve genehmigt.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave Control Zone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Squawk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4360</id>
		<title>Vienna</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4360"/>
		<updated>2021-02-17T10:14:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport (IATA:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, ICAO: LOWW) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox airport&lt;br /&gt;
| name         = Vienna International Airport&lt;br /&gt;
| nativename   = Flughafen Wien-Schwechat&lt;br /&gt;
| image        = Flughafenschwechat.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width  = 200&lt;br /&gt;
| image2       = &lt;br /&gt;
| image2-width = &lt;br /&gt;
| IATA         = VIE&lt;br /&gt;
| ICAO         = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| type         = Private&lt;br /&gt;
| owner        =&lt;br /&gt;
| operator     = Flughafen Wien AG&lt;br /&gt;
| city-served  = Vienna, Austria&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bratislava, Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
| location     = Schwechat, Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| hub          = Austrian Airlines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Niki&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-f  = 600&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-m  = 183&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates  = &lt;br /&gt;
| latd =  48 | latm = 06 | lats = 37 | latNS = N&lt;br /&gt;
| longd= 016 | longm= 34 | longs= 11 | longEW= E&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_type       =&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_region     = AT&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_notitle    = yes&lt;br /&gt;
| website      = [http://www.viennaairport.com/ www.viennaairport.com]&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map            = Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label_position =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label          = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_alt        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_mapsize        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_image          = Austria relief location map.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_caption    = Location within Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-elev  = Y&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-rwy   = y&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-number    = 11/29&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-f  = 11,483&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-m  = 3,500&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-number    = 16/34&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-f  = 11,811&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-m  = 3,600&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| footnotes    = &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Air_Transport_Association_airport_code IATA]:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Civil_Aviation_Organization_airport_code ICAO]: LOWW)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport of the Austrian capital Vienna, is located south-east of the city and is connected by a train (called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/City_Airport_Train CAT – City Airport Train]) as well as a motorway to the Viennese City Center. The airport is famous as an east-west junction with over 27.0 Million passengers (2018) a year. The profitable Eastern Europe routes are provided by the homecarrier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austrian_Airlines Austrian]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the year 2005 the “[http://www.viennaairport.com/ Flughafen Wien AG]” started to build the so called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vienna_International_Airport#Terminals SKYLINK], an additional terminal in the eastern part of the airport which offers space for 91 check-in counters as well as 51 additional gates (5 of them are A380-approved). In the year 2006 the new air traffic control tower was opened. With it’s height of 109 meters, it’s the tallest control tower in Europe. It can be seen from far away, so it got a landmark for the airport. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal 1 offers space for the carriers of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aeroflot Aeroflot] and [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emirates_%28airline%29 Emirates]. Terminal 1A is located right opposite of Terminal 1 and is a temporarily building to bridge the capacity constraint until the new SKYLINK Terminal will be finished soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport offers 2 asphalt [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Runway runways] with orientations 11/29 (3.500 meters) and 16/34 (3.600 meters). All of them are equipped with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrument_landing_system ILS system], 2 of them offer [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CAT_III#ILS_categories CAT III B]. Just recently (April 2012), a decision has been made to build a third runway parallel to 11-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= LOWW for Pilots =&lt;br /&gt;
== A quick look around ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna Airport is a medium range international airport, which - like many of them - has grown organically. Like all airports of this kind, they have peculiarities - most of them making life complicated for controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the ground ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aprons and parking positions ====&lt;br /&gt;
''(See the LOWW charts &amp;quot;overview&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;parking positions&amp;quot;, available [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW here]].)'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation Center (GAC)''' is at the far west connecting to TWY M via TWYs Q and P. This Area is used for all GA A/C&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technical base''' (if you blew up a tyre on landing) is next, opposite Exit 14 and 15. Many GAC pilots start from there (for whichever reason).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The A apron''' is for cargo and at the very west&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Apron B''' is next to the East come two rows of stands for smaller aircraft. Regional planes like Dash, Beech 1900 or RJ87 go there often, and it is also the company apron of Austrian regional connector flights. Beware of the one-way street: '''B71-B75''' enter and leave (pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B81-B85''' enter via taxilane 32 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B91-B96''' enter via taxilane 33 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 32.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier West''' covers the '''C gates'''. It is the &amp;quot;Schengen&amp;quot; pier with no passport control. Log in for your departure, if you fly within the Schengen area. The two gates at the corner (C36 and C39) are suitable for Heavies. Expect some broken glass in the terminal, if you log into C31 with an Airbus A330 :-). Most Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft depart from here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier East''' covers the '''D gates'''. This is the &amp;quot;Non-Schengen&amp;quot; pier, mostly for Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft. Again, the corner goates (D23, D27) are Heavy gates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Further East along taxiway L are the '''E stands'''. In this area the low cost carriers park, as gates are more expensive than stands. Aircraft park nose-south: They enter via taxilane 36 and leave onto L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* East of the main terminal is the new Skylink, now named '''[[http://www.viennaairport.com/jart/prj3/va/main.jart?rel=en&amp;amp;content-id=1249344074277 Check-in 3]]''' Access for aircraft is divided: For the south (F01-F37, odd), aircraft use taxilane 35/26, for the north (F04-F36, even), it's taxilane 40 Center for Heavies. &lt;br /&gt;
*Medium Aircraft will be cleared via the Blue or Orange Line respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
Check-in 3 is Schengen-and-non-Schengen and is the home pier for the Star Alliance fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilanes 35/36/37''' are one-way streets, but the direction changes according to runway configuration. Expect ground controller to issue a &amp;quot;pushback facing east/west&amp;quot; clearance. If you don't get any facing instruction, face east, as you are most likely to get out this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilane 38''' is exit-only: Aircraft parking on F41-F59, as well as F41-F50 use it to leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The H apron''' is north of taxilane 40. H41-H48 are pushback stands, H49-H50 leave via taxilane 42.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The K apron''' is for cargo and at the very northeast, accessible via E and taxilane 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Where to log in with which aircraft ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to fly as-real-as-it-gets, then you can use the following guidelines for login:&lt;br /&gt;
* Star Alliance birds of the size of an A320 or more usually park at the skylink.&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Star Alliance aircraft park on the pier West (Schengen) and East (Non-Schengen)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Cost Carrier usually start from the E apron and F41-F59, as well as the H apron.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cargo leaves from K&lt;br /&gt;
* Larger GAC aircraft (like a Challenger) leave from B or GAC East&lt;br /&gt;
* Small GAC aircraft (like sports aircraft) leave from GAC West.&lt;br /&gt;
* Super-large birds have  F44, F48, H49 and H50. Sorry, no gates for the A380 in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On high traffic situations (Like the Weekly Wed) it might be good to look around before loggin in - you might sit on top of another aircraft. You can use [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/gatelist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW the gatelist]] from the VACC Austria homepage or use the more remote places to log in, like the corners of the Pier (C31, C42, D21, D29) or the mostly vacant Check-in 3. There is no hassle on B, E and H stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxiing ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is, where the &amp;quot;evolutionary&amp;quot; design of Vienna airport hits reality - Vienna is not quite spacious to taxi around. Make sure to be slow enough and to follow ground controller instructions - you find yourself in the grass, in a building, head on to or even crashing into a fellow aircraft if you don't. Be aware: There is '''no follow-me car''' in Vienna, even if MSFS shows you one. Be so kind and follow the instructions of the ground controller or face a disconnect. On busy days (like the weekly wednesday) you can seriously screw up traffic by not following instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, unlike other major airports (like EGLL), there are no unique and published taxiing directions - taxiways are used in either way following runway configuration. There is not even a uniform standard, how controllers handle traffic for specific runway configurations - it's where controllers do it their ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you fly into Vienna with ATC control, then you get taxi instructions - follow them, full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't, then you can use the following rough guidelines: You have some roughly parallel taxiways with W-L into one way and M-E into the opposite direction. Easiest is to follow these taxiways right-around. ATC will guide you differently (as right-around-only is inefficient), but if you have not, it is most likely that you don't end up nose-to-nose:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 11''': Taxi down to L (coming from the north: via W), changing to M on exit 12, if you are more than a light aircraft (wingspan - you might smash some Cessnas standing around on GAC East) for departure from A11 or A12. Taxilane 36 is eastwards for W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 16''': Taxi down to M and via Ex1 and Ex24 up E to Ex31. Taxilane 36 is eastwards to W where (strictly followed) you should drive right-around (W, Ex2, Ex1, Ex24, E) or you might look out and cut the corner to the left and Ex23 to E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 29''': Taxi down to M (from north: via W)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 34''': Taxi down to M and E - from north: only via E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 11''': Leave on M, take next exit to L to the terminal, or take A2, Ex1 Ex24 and E for the northern stands. Right-around would also mean that taxilane 36 is eastwards via Ex7 and taxilane 35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 16''': Vacate to E and taxi up to the northern aprons, or turn left for L for the terminal and for taxilanes 35+36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 29''': Leave to M and taxi to the terminal, or take Ex1, Ex24 and E for the northern apron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 34''': Take W and taxilane 40 for the northern aprons or L for and taxilane 35-36 for GAC, terminals and southern stands. If you brake hard, you can cut the corner and vacate B4 and L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Departure ==&lt;br /&gt;
... from Vienna is like any other larger airport. You have delivery, Ground and Tower and follow the procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clearance procedures ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS in Vienna is at 122.95. Please tune it in before asking for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voice? Newbie? ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Controllers love voice partners, and if this is not possible, voice receivers. If you are text-only, then expect delays - voice is first when times get busy. &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't worry if you are a newbie - everyone was one. Please write it into the comment field of your flight plan and take your time. Controllers get along with pilots asking &amp;quot;say again&amp;quot;, taxiing slowly, but doing the right thing. They are unhappy with those who hurry and mess up traffic (and they dislike impolite people). If you want guidance for your first flights (via teamspeak for example), you might want to make you a login at the [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Forum]] and put a request into [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/viewforum.php?f=58 this section]], and some people will be glad to help you along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clearance Altitudes ====&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has one clearance altitude for all departures: 5000ft (local QNH). Transition altitude is 10.000ft. For you it means, that you have to change your Altimeter when passing 10.000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SID's ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will give you a SID. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable for RNAV departures (i.e.: if you don't have a FMC), then please state it in your flight plan and file a non-RNAV flight plan. There are two non-RNAV departures per runway (to WGM VOR and SNU VOR), from which you will get one. From there, you will fly direct to your next waypoint.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable to fly any SID, then you can ask for vectored departure. You will receive initial instructions from Delivery (like &amp;quot;stay on runway heading&amp;quot;) and further instructions from ATC. Bear in mind, that ATC can deny vectored departures, if the air is boiling.&lt;br /&gt;
* For noise abatement reasons, some SID's are closed after 21:00 local time. See the charts to find out, which. Some controllers use noise abatement, some don't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push and Start ===&lt;br /&gt;
Some folks ask for push and fall asleep. Some folks ask for push, push and then fall asleep. Both mess up ground movements considerably. If you are slow with your plane, then please start up on the gate and ask for push when ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== After takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vienna has defined SIDs, so you should fly them. Most of them are RNAV. There are vectored departures on request or on ATC's discretion. &lt;br /&gt;
* Expect to be transferred to the appropriate approach controller right after takeoff - tune the frequency into standby already on ground. If Tower forgets, you might remind him with a polite &amp;quot;&amp;lt;callsign&amp;gt;, airborne&amp;quot; once you pass 2000ft or so :-)&lt;br /&gt;
* On all normal days, there is only one approach controller at 134,675. &lt;br /&gt;
* On very-high-traffic events like &amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;, Approach is divided north-south, with either 134.675 or 118,775 - look for the active stations while still on ground. &amp;quot;Your&amp;quot; station varies according to the SID you fly - it's in the SID chart.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no Approach controller is online, LOVV_CTR with 134,350 is your station, and if this station is offline, contact UNICOM at 122,8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arrival ==&lt;br /&gt;
You will enter the approach procedures when reaching the initial STAR waypoints. Before you reach them, listen to LOWW_ATIS at 122.95, and when transferred to Approach, you call in with callsign, position, altitude and ATIS on board:&lt;br /&gt;
 LHA123: Wien Radar, Leipzig 123, inbound VENEN, FL250 descending FL170, ATIS B on board.&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: Leipzig 123, Wien radar, identified, information B correct, descend FL140.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like every major European airport, LOWW has STAR, transitions and approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
=== STAR's ===&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will most likely clear you a STAR and an altitude to descend. At the end of each STAR is a holding which you might be ordered to enter. Altitudes on the chart are minimum altitudes - ATC will tell you the altitude to fly. In the case of Vienna, STARs are also unique: From each entry point, there is only one STAR to take. As a pilot, you could as well key in the STAR into your FMC straight away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitions are runway-specific - you know your transition once you know the runway, and you know the runway once you listened to ATIS. Therefore, you can key in your STAR while on cruise, and your transition while approaching or flying the STAR. Don't forget: ATC will clear you the transition or vector you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is vital that you have your transition on FMC, as (see below) ATC might order you to cut corners and then continue to fly the transition. It is also vital, that you look up the approach chart once you know the runway and key in the necessary frequencies for ILS approach and for go-around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Director ===&lt;br /&gt;
On busy days, the last phase before landing has a Director: He/she is responsible for the nitty-gritty spacing in the &amp;quot;string of pearls&amp;quot; where traffic is dense for two reasons: 1) aircraft merge from all directions, and 2) aircraft slow down. Expect ATC transfer you, if Director is online. Usually, you call Director &amp;quot;callsign only&amp;quot; - no position, no altitude, only &amp;quot;Wien Director, Leipzig 123&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once established on the ILS (or on visual final), Director will transfer you to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to handle directions on approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually, you are cleared a STAR and transition - As soon as you know ATIS, you are able to key in the transition into your FMC.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to fly direct to a waypoint on the STAR or transition, you fly direct to the waypoint and then follow the transition to final.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC never orders an altitude, you fly the altitudes on the charts (but ATC never does that).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC vectors you, than you leave STAR and transition altogether (expect to be vectored or direct-ed until final).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level UNTIL a certain waypoint, descend at your descretion, as long as you match the altitude at that point (you can level off before).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level AT a certain waypoint, then calculate well and descend to meet the altitude at the point - not before, not after.&lt;br /&gt;
* If in doubt, ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vacating and taxiing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you land on rwy11/29 and rwy34, then vacating throws you into the middle of dense traffic - stop on the exit and wait for ground instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you vacate from rwy16, then you can roll on D or E and wait for instructions - frees the exit for the next hungry aircraft behind. You should definitely stop before D4 or E4 - they are ILS critical holding points which you should not cross without clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Communication failure ===&lt;br /&gt;
... is published on the charts - please set your squawk 7600 and follow it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4356</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4356"/>
		<updated>2021-02-15T22:03:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Making contact */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien, Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4355</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4355"/>
		<updated>2021-02-15T09:22:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give a takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway separation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the Proceedings aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the Control Zone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224: Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR: AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land at your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is standard practice in Vienna to issue landing clearance latest 1 NM Final. No special phraseology is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289: Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR Traffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve genehmigt.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave Control Zone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Squawk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4353</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4353"/>
		<updated>2021-02-14T13:49:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Departing Traffic */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This also means that you will have to tell pilots to stand by while you attend to other matters. Make sure you keep a list of aircraft you told to stand by so you don't forget to call them back. This also means, that you might have to set priority in services which aircraft in the air need first, like setting up ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give him the takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceeding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway Seperation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called a conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the preceeding aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 e.g.: OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the controlzone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C: cleared for takeoff runway 16, DLH32C.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:cleared to land runway 27, MAH224.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Runway 27, cleared to land, AUA26T.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 eg. the rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land on your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is standard practice in Vienna to issue landing clearance latest 1 NM Final. No special phraseology is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123: Behind landing C750 lining up RWY 29 behind, AUA123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289:Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT:Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR TRaffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve nach dem Abheben so bald als möglich.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave controlzone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn after departure as soon as practicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, set Sqauwk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4352</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4352"/>
		<updated>2021-02-14T13:49:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Departing Traffic */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This also means that you will have to tell pilots to stand by while you attend to other matters. Make sure you keep a list of aircraft you told to stand by so you don't forget to call them back. This also means, that you might have to set priority in services which aircraft in the air need first, like setting up ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give him the takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceeding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway Seperation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called a conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the preceeding aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 e.g.: OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the controlzone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C: cleared for takeoff runway 16, DLH32C.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:cleared to land runway 27, MAH224.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Runway 27, cleared to land, AUA26T.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 eg. the rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land on your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is standard practice in Vienna to issue landing clearance latest 1 NM Final. No special phraseology is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123: Behind landing C750 lining up RWY 29 behind, AUA123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289:Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT:Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR TRaffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve nach dem Abheben so bald als möglich.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave controlzone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn after departure as soon as practicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, set Sqauwk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4351</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Tower</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Tower&amp;diff=4351"/>
		<updated>2021-02-14T13:49:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Study Guide is designed to give you all the information you need to become a Tower Controller within VACC Austria. We assume that you have already read the [[Study Guide:OBS]], [[Study Guide:Delivery]] and [[Study Guide:Ground]] and that you have some experience controlling on VATSIM. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reach tower, you will handle aircraft in the air for the first time. So we will discuss some basic principles of flying before actually talking about procedures. Also we'll have to talk about some organisational issues. The fourth chapter of this article will then familiarize you with the procedures you need for controlling tower positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euroscope Visibilty Range for Tower should not exceed 50nm (regarding to Vatsim CoC C12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aircraft and basic Flying Principles  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Producing Lift  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an aircraft to fly the lift force produced by (mostly) the wings has to outweigh the gravitational force that affects the aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically a wing produces lift by deflecting the air it moves through into one direction. According to Newton's third law of motion the lift is produced into the opposite direction. This lift grows with the speed the aircraft has in relation to the air and with the angle the wing draws with the direction of movement. This angle is called Angle of Attack (AoA). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle only works as long as a steady airflow around the wing exists. As soon as the airflow seperates from the wings surface the lift starts to decerease. The AoA at which this occurs is called critical Angle of Attack. It depends on the profile of the wing and it's dimensions but for subsonic aircrafts it typically lies between 8 and 21 degrees. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Think of an level flying aircraft that reduces it speed. In order to compensate the reducing lift the pilot has to raise the nose. However at some point the Angle of Attack will cross the critical angle of Attack and the pilot will find himself in a stall. So the speed of an aircraft is limited on the lower side by the so called stall speed but the aircraft is also limit by aerodynamics in higher range of speed (buffeting). Because the stall speed depends on the profile most aircraft are equipped with devices that alter the profile during flight such as flaps or slats (Approach). In General when an aircraft fly it will produce thrust but at same time it produce drag. So if you fly just horizontal (cruise) you have at the same time Lift=weight and thrust=drag. Drag produce automatic noise and that is the big problem. to prevent this we have different procedures in the approach and a lot of research in aviation to reduce the sound of the aircraft but the main part are the engines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On approach pilots have to fly in a certain speed range in order to conduct a safe landing. The lower boundary is called landing reference speed and is often a fixed multiple of the stall speed. As a result of this the approach speed also depends on weight an aircraft configuration (Flap/Slat setting). For safety the Approach Vapp is higher than Vref and the difference depends mostly on the weather conditions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally you can say that bigger aircraft also have a bigger approach speed however at some point this rule does not work anymore because the Vref depends largely on the aircrafts weight in relation to it's maximum takeoff weight (MTOW). The speed ranges from 50 knots in a C150 up to 170 knots with a fully loaded 747. However for example it is possible that a light 747 is slower than a fully loaded 737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aircraft Categories  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important ways of categorizing aircraft in aviation are by weight or by approach speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Weight Categories  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized into three weight categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''MTOW'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Super Aircraft (S)&lt;br /&gt;
| is only one: the A380&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a list of aircrafts in this link [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php?title=Category:Aircraft&amp;amp;until=D228] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Weight depicted is MTOW.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approach Speed  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft are categorized by their reference approach speed (Vref) at maximum landing weight: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Category''' &lt;br /&gt;
| '''Vref'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| A &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt;= 90 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| B &lt;br /&gt;
| 91 - 120 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| C &lt;br /&gt;
| 121 - 140 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| D &lt;br /&gt;
| 141 - 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| E &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;= 165 knots&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you start controlling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower is responsible ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements on the runways &lt;br /&gt;
- for all movements within the control zone (see &amp;quot;Airspace Structure&amp;quot; below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tower decides which runways are in use and maintains the ATIS. Tower is also responsible for ground and delivery if they are not online or if they are not defined for that particular airport (LOWS has DEL, but no GND; LOWI, LOWG and LOWK have only TWR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Airspace Structure around Major Airports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Major airports in Austria are surrounded by a so called control zone (CTR) which is a class D airspace. This means that all aircraft need a clearance to enter this airspace. So either they are cleared to an approach or you need to clear them specifically into the control zone. Details will be discussed in the VFR part later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transition Altitude/Transition Level  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircraft Altimeters use the air pressure around them to determine their actual altitude. In order to get correct readings you have to use the actual local pressure in your area. As a memory hook you can use this: The altimeter needle moves in the same direction you turn the rotary knob to adjust the pressure. If you turn it counterclockwise, the needle also turns counterclockwise and therefor indicates a lower altitude. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As ground pressure changes every hundred miles, aircraft would need to update their settings every few minutes. If ALL aircraft would need to do this, it would be terribly unpractical and dangerous. Guess what happens if one forgets? So the altitude is &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lower areas (where terrain is near), aircraft have to update local settings. Most aircraft are there only for takeoff and landing, so no big deal.&lt;br /&gt;
* In higher areas, aircraft all tune a standard setting (QNH 1013 or 29.92 HG) - this setting may be &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot;, but as all aircraft have the same &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; setting, it does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And where is the altitude where that changes?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For climbing aircraft, it is the Transition Altitude, where they change from local to standard pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
* For descending aircraft, it is the Transition Level, where they change from standard to local pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the two, there is a safety layer (called &amp;quot;Transition Layer&amp;quot;) which compensates for the difference between local and standard pressure, which is 1000ft minimum, so the stack is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Upper airspace: measured in Flight Levels (FL220 = Altitude 22.000ft at standard settings)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Level: the lowest Flight Level&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition layer (to keep distance)&lt;br /&gt;
 Transition Altitude (TA): the highest altitude cleared at local pressure settings&lt;br /&gt;
 Lower airspace, where altitude is given (you write &amp;quot;A5000ft&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the difference between TA and TL varies with pressure (the lower local pressure, the thinner), the size of the Transition Layer varies (the lower local pressure, the thicker). Use the following table to calculated your TRL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH      &amp;amp;lt; 0977: TA + 3000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 0978 - 1013: TA + 2000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014 - 1050: TA + 1000 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1051 &amp;amp;gt;    &amp;amp;nbsp;: TA = TL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Working as a Tower Controller  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the right priorities===&lt;br /&gt;
The moment you are responsible for more than one aircraft you will have to set priorities in your handling. As a general guideline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft in the air have top priority - you take care of them first. Reason: They can't stop.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft moving on the ground have next priority. They could bump into each other.&lt;br /&gt;
#aircraft standing on ground have the least priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This also means that you will have to tell pilots to stand by while you attend to other matters. Make sure you keep a list of aircraft you told to stand by so you don't forget to call them back. This also means, that you might have to set priority in services which aircraft in the air need first, like setting up ATIS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Runway Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The runways are one of the most dangerous spots on an airport because aircraft are travelling at high speed with little room to maneuver and most of the time no ability to stop at a reasonable distance. Because of this the general rule is that '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;only one aircaft may be cleared to use a runway at the same time.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' What this means practically and exceptions from this rule are explained in the following chapters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departing Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now we are at the point where the pilot reaches the Holding Point of his departure runway and reports ready for departure. What are the things you should check before issuing the takeoff clearance? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Have a look at the flightplan. Take note of the type of aircraft and the Departure Route. &lt;br /&gt;
*Check the traffic approaching the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give him the takeoff clearance the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, wind 320 degrees, 7 knots, Runway 29, cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot lines up on the runway, advances the throttle and takes off. When he is well established in climb check he is squawking Mode C and the right Code. Afterwards he is handed off to the next Controller, in this case a radar position:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2CM, contact Wien Radar frequency 134.675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next aircraft reports ready for departure. Again check the points above, but this time we cannot give the takeoff clearance straight away because the preceeding aircraft is still occupying the runway. Now you get to know the first exception to the Runway Seperation rule above. To speed things up you can instruct the next aircraft to line up behind the first one while this one is still in the takeoff roll occupying the runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AZA639, behind departing Austrian Airbus A319, line-up rwy 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''Note: you '''must''' add another &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; at the end of the clearance!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of clearance is called a conditional clearance. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The earliest possible point where you can issue the next takeoff clearance is, when the preceeding aircraft has overflown the opposite runway end or has clearly turned onto either side of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; However in some cases this could be very close which leads us to the next chapter but before lets have a quick look on helicopters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Helicopter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters are sometimes able to depart from their current position i.e helipad, GAC, TWY. Nevertheless they may also depart via runways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 e.g.: OEBXR: Wien Tower, OEBXR at G-A-C request to leave the controlzone via Klosterneuburg.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Wien Tower, after departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: After departure leave control zone via VFR Route Klosterneuburg, 1500 ft or below, SQ7000.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Correct, ready for departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Affirm&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: 260 deg 4 kts, Take off own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Airborn Time 52'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Take care! Phraseology around the runway is vital ====&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, at the Tenerife Airport, two 747 Jumbo Jets collided on the runway and burst up in flames, killing more than 500 people. There was a simple cause: misunderstandings in the takeoff phraseology: Tower said &amp;quot;standby for takeoff&amp;quot;, the pilot understood &amp;quot;cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;. So, there is two iron rules which you should never break as Tower controller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot; only when you clear for takeoff: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared for takeoff&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like that the aircraft can leave in 2 minutes), then use the word &amp;quot;departure&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Use the word &amp;quot;landing&amp;quot; only when you clear for landing: Say &amp;quot;&amp;lt;aircraft&amp;gt; cleared to land&amp;quot; and nothing else.''' If you have to say anything else (like where to leave the runway after touchdown), use the word &amp;quot;arrival&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Departure Separation  ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several factors to take into consideration when deciding what the minimum separation between succeeding aircraft is. It is the tower controller's responsibility to decide which kind of separation to apply. The following types of separation shall be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Time Based Separation|Time Based Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[#Radar Separation|Radar Separation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION: Regardless of separation minima to be used, the following rule ALWAYS applies:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Departing aircraft will not normally be permitted to commence take-off until&lt;br /&gt;
*the preceding departing aircraft has crossed the end of the runway-in-use or&lt;br /&gt;
*has started a turn or&lt;br /&gt;
*until all preceding landing aircraft are clear of the runway-in-use.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this paragraph is not about the actual clearance. You may clear an aircraft - considering the minima below - for takeoff before the above conditions are fulfilled, taking into account the time it will take the aircraft, until the actual takeoff can be commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Time Based Separation  ====&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid hazards created by the turbulence formed at the wing tips of aicraft (wakes), separation based on time shall be applied between succeeding departing traffic. This is due to the fact, that wakes need a certain time to dissipate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual time to apply depends on the wake turbulence category and thus on the weight of the aircraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light Aircraft (L) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;lt; 7 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium Aircraft (M) &lt;br /&gt;
| 7 000 – 136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy Aircraft (H) &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;amp;gt;136 000 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 2 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are using:&lt;br /&gt;
*the same runway&lt;br /&gt;
*crossing runways if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by less than 760m'' (no applicable in Austria)&lt;br /&gt;
*''parallel runways separated by 760 m (2 500 ft) or more, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross the projected flight path of the first aircraft at the same altitude or less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 2 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== 3 Minutes =====&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that succeeding aircraft are taking off from:&lt;br /&gt;
*an intermediate part of the same runway (read: intersection)&lt;br /&gt;
*''an intermediate part of a parallel runway separated by less than 760 m (2 500 ft) (not applicable in Austria)''&lt;br /&gt;
a minimum separation of 3 minutes applies whenever a&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light or Medium&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Heavy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Light&lt;br /&gt;
| follows&lt;br /&gt;
| Medium&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In LOWW the following intersections are, for the purposes of wake vortex, NOT considered to be intersection departures:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A11 and A12&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A1 and A2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B1 and B2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B11 and B12&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To point out this hazard to a pilot the following phrase should be used: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:DLH32C, wind 180 degrees, 3 knots, runway 16 cleared for takeoff, &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;caution wake turbulence.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH32C: cleared for takeoff runway 16, DLH32C.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Radar Separation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For radar equipped TWR stations, which in Austria are basically all controlled TWR stations, departure separation shall be as such, that departing aircraft are entering the approach airspace with radar separation. For LOWW_TWR these minima are for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Traffic&lt;br /&gt;
|Distance&lt;br /&gt;
|Condition&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on different SIDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 3 nm &lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Departing traffic on same SIDs &lt;br /&gt;
| 5 nm&lt;br /&gt;
| increasing&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Note: LUGEM and MEDIX count as the same SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Deciding Which Separation to apply ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to provide an expeditous flow of traffic for departing traffic, it is imperative for the tower controller to always apply the lowest separation minimum. Since time based separation is always the larger of the minima, it should always be strived to achieve radar separation. In principle, taking the minima above into consideration, radar separation may always be applied when suceeding departing traffic is in the same wake turbulence category or if a heavier aircraft is departing behind a lighter one.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, time based separation has to be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tips And Tricks ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid having multiple aircraft using the same SID depart the same runway right after each other. Throw in a departure with another SID in between to utilize the 3nm radar separation minimum instead of 5.&lt;br /&gt;
*If possible, have heavier planes depart behind lighter ones, so you avoid having to use time based separation. Of course, take this with a grain of salt, since you can't let the heavier aircraft wait forever.&lt;br /&gt;
*To achieve radar separation as soon as possible, use initial visual turns if weather permits (VMC). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA117M, after departure visual right turn to SOVIL is approved, wind calm, runway 11 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the aircraft will make a very early right turn, allowing you to have the next aircraft takeoff within seconds, provided it is not lighter than the preceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
*The ground controller should send aircraft to your frequency early enough during taxi - provided that there are no conflicts on the ground - that you should be able to distribute the aircraft onto the different holding points to your needs. Use the holding points in order to prepare a proper departure sequence that allows you to use the lowest minima possible.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: According to the austrian AIP, the pilot shall prepare and be ready to use the following intersections for departure:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Runway&lt;br /&gt;
| Intersections&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| A10&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| B4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| A3 (west)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| B10&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For those intersections it is normally not necessary to ask a pilot if he is able - it is his obligation to tell ground upon requesting taxi clearance or latest upon initial contact with the tower controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arriving Aircraft call you when they are established on an approach to a runway. Most of the time this is an ILS Approach but also other kinds are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:Linz Tower, MAH224 established ILS Approach rwy 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again you are not allowed to clear more than one aircraft onto the same runway at the same time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In order to issue a landing clearance &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding departing traffic must have overflown the opposite runway threshold or clearly turned onto either side of the runway. &lt;br /&gt;
#preceeding landing traffic must have left the runway safety strip with all parts. &lt;br /&gt;
#traffic crossing the runway must have left the runway safety strip with all parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these conditions are met use the following phrase to clear the aircraft: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:MAH224, Linz Tower, wind 300 degerees 16 knots, runway 27, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  MAH224:cleared to land runway 27, MAH224.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During periods of high traffic it is likely that you have more than one aircraft approaching the same runway at the same time. Approach has to ensure the minimum radar seperation of 3 nm and additionally increased seperation due to wake turbulence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Linz Tower, AUA26T established ILS 27.&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T, Linz Tower, continue approach, wind 300 degrees 16 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Meanwhile MAH224 has left the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  TWR:AUA26T wind 310 degrees 14 knots, runway 27 cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
  AUA26T:Runway 27, cleared to land, AUA26T.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA81 is approaching runway 16, OE-AGA is on left base runway 16 and there is a rescue helicopter operating in the area around Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:Wien Tower, AUA81 established ILS 16&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, Wien Tower, VFR traffic is on left base rwy 16, continue approach, wind 140&lt;br /&gt;
 degrees 7 knots.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81:continuing approach, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA81, There is a rescue helicopter operating west of the extended centerline, presently at&lt;br /&gt;
 your one o'clock position, 5 nm, 1400 ft.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: Thank you, looking out, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA81: traffic in sight, AUA81.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helicopters don't need a Runway for the approach, sometimes they are able to land at their parking position, lets have a look on the Phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 eg. the rescue helicopter from the example above needs to land on your airport:&lt;br /&gt;
 OEBXR: Wien Tower, Freudenau 1500ft for landing.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEBXR, Fly direct G-A-C, stay north of extended centerline RWY 11, 020 deg 4 kts, land own discretion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To give you an idea how dense traffic can get in real life consider that during peak times and good weather the seperation is reduced to 2,5 nm. This equals to one landing every 75 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Issuing &amp;quot;late clearances&amp;quot;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is standard practice in Vienna to issue landing clearance latest 1 NM Final. No special phraseology is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Merging Departing and Arriving Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And now to the most fun part of being a Tower Controller. Sometimes you get into the situation that you use the same runway for departures and arrivals. Either your airport has only one runway or weather demand this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Still the above rule of only one aircraft at the same time applies, however we also use conditional clearances which look very similar to those above in the departing traffic section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: AUA123, behind next landing C750 line up RWY 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123: Behind landing C750 lining up RWY 29 behind, AUA123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To depart an aircraft in front of an approaching aircraft at the time of the departure clearance given the arriving aircraft should not be closer than 4 nm to touchdown. To squeeze a departing aircraft between two arrivals you normally need a minimum of 6 nm between them. It is important for you to check carefully if you have the necessary gap, so have a close look at the distance between the arrivals and their speed. If the second one comes in faster than normal consider this in your calculation. Also you should make sure, that the pilot will be ready for departure when you need him to depart. To check this use the following phrase: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Ready for immediate departure?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Tower Controller at Vienna airport. Runway 29 is active for departures and arrivals. One aircraft is on a 5 nm final, one at 12 nm out. Additionally you have two departures waiting at the holding point of runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: CAL275, ready for immediate departure?&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: Affirm &lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: Wind 250 deg 6 kts, Runway 29 cleared for immediate takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 CAL275: cleared for immediate takeoff runway 29, CAL275&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| After the CAL B747 has taken off.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA289, wind 300 degrees 7 knots, runway 29, cleared to land.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA289:Runway 29, cleared to land, AUA289.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:AUA2LT, behind landing Airbus line up runway 29 behind.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT:Behind the landing Airbus, lining up runway 29 behind, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AUA289 has vacated the runway.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: AUA2LT, wind 300 degrees 8 knots, runway 29 cleared for takeoff.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA2LT: cleared for takeoff runway 29, AUA2LT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VFR Traffic  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Differences to handling of IFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essential collision safety principle guiding the VFR pilot is &amp;quot;see and avoid.&amp;quot; Pilots flying under VFR assume responsibility for their separation from all other aircraft and are generally not assigned routes or altitudes by air traffic control. Governing agencies establish specific requirements for VFR flight, consisting of minimum visibility, distance from clouds, and altitude to ensure that aircraft operating under VFR can be seen from a far enough distance to ensure safety. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To guide VFR TRaffic through your airspace you make use of VFR Routes, Sectors, and reporting Points. '''Used phrases''': &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, enter control zone via VFR route Klosterneuburg, 1500ft or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1020, Squawk 7000, report XXXX (i.e. Freudenau), expect runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA hold (orbit) overhead XXXX (i.e. Freudenau) in XXXX (i.e. 2500ft)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR flights should be guided into downwind, base and final leg for landing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join downwind for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, join base for runway 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VFR Flights Squawk and basic information (active runway, QNH etc.) from Delivery, the route clearance from &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Tower&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;. After startup, they will contact Ground for taxi, thereafter the Tower will issue the clearance. A possible VFR clearance could be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, verlassen Sie die Kontrollzone über Sichtflugstrecke Klosterneuburg, 1500 Fuß&lt;br /&gt;
 oder darunter, QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, Rechtskurve nach dem Abheben so bald als möglich.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, leave controlzone via VFR-route Klosterneuburg, 1500 feet or below,&lt;br /&gt;
 QNH 1014, Squawk 7000, right turn after departure as soon as practicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, steigen sie auf 3500 Fuß, melden Sie Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, climb 3500 feet, report Donauturm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the air ATC provides [[traffic information]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR:OE-AGA, Traffic at your 12 o'clock position, 2100 feet, a PA28 on VFR inbound&lt;br /&gt;
 route Klosterneuburg-Freudenau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the aircraft leaves the control zone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, set Sqauwk 7000, you may leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wien Tower/Turm can also be contacted in German.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Merging in VFR Traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage VFR Traffic efficiently you have to use [[traffic information]] and visual separation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of other traffic, it might be necessary for the aircraft to remain in the downwind leg until the traffic has passed: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Extend right downwind.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Extending right downwind, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To instruct the aircraft to continue it's approach use the following procedure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-ANX, traffic at your 3 o´clock position, moving right to left, B767, distance 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
 miles, report mentioned traffic in sight&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ANX: Traffic in sight, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, behind B767 traffic, join final RWY 29, caution wake turbulence&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Behind B767, join final RWY 29 behind, caution wake turbulence, OE-ANX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using an extended downwind you should always consider that the aircraft's speed might be considerably lower than the speed of other aircraft involved. So if an aircraft has to fly a long way out it might take some time for it to come all the way back, generating a big gap in the arrival sequence. Instead you should aim to keep the plane within the vicinity of the airfield: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Make a right three-sixty.&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Making three-sixty to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OE-AGA, Orbit left&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-AGA: Orbiting left, OE-AGA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second instructions mean, that the pilot should make orbits until further advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to ask VFR traffic for a speed reduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TWR: OEABW, Fly speed 90 kts&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABW: 90 kts, OEABW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Special VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
Could be used when weather Minimums are below VFR condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weather minimums for (S)VFR are follow&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Base Cloud at min. 600ft&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- visibility min 1500m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Used phrases''':  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug über Donauroute. &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus steigen auf 600 ft, dann Rechtskurve Steuerkurs 340.  &lt;br /&gt;
 Verlassen Sie Kontrollzone als Sonder-Sichtflug. Nach dem Abheben geradeaus bis zur Ende der Raffinerie. Folgen Sie der Donau. Ausflug Richtung Norden genehmigt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR via November&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading 600 ft then right turn heading 340&lt;br /&gt;
 Leave control zone special-VFR. After departure climb on runway heading until end of refinery. turn right heading 360, follow the Danube. Leaving control zone to the noth approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Night VFR  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night VFR is handled like any other VFR flight. Adherence to special procedures associated with flying VFR after ECET and clearance of terrain is the responsibility of the PIC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Traffic Pattern ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traffic pattern is separated into departure, crosswind, downwind, base, and final.&lt;br /&gt;
On request, the Tower controller can clear VFR traffic into the traffic pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join traffic pattern Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, after departure, join downwind runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If the controller clears an aircraft into any part of the pattern, it implies the clearance for the whole pattern.'''&lt;br /&gt;
To tell the pilot to maintain on the downwind use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, extend downwind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 OEABC, I call you for base&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordination with other ATC Stations ===&lt;br /&gt;
''Communication from one controller to another is as important as the communication from controller to pilot.'' This is especially true during high traffic situations where you might be tempted to concentrate solely on what is happening on your frequency. In these situations don't hesitate to take a call from a fellow controller even if it means that a pilot has to wait before you call him back. Secondly, if you know a controller is busy, try to keep your conversation with him concisely and avoid chatting in a teamspeak channel next to him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within VACC Austria we usually use teamspeak to coordinate with each other. The coordination with other ATC units is mostly done per private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
Other means of communication are the Intercom functions of Euroscope which would be a very nice feature, however often they only work with certain controllers. The ATC Channel within Euroscope should not be used for individual coordination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you come online or go offline you should inform neighboring ATC stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reduced Runway Separation Minima  (LOWW) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Each runway in Vienna has a 2400m-marker indicated on the runway - be aware that the second marker from the respective threshold is the 2400m-marker for that very threshold:&lt;br /&gt;
For details refer to ICAO DOC4444 7.11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application of RRSM:&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared for takeoff, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An aircraft may be cleared to land, given that:&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding landing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker, is in motion and is not required to make a backtrack.&lt;br /&gt;
* a preceding departing aircraft has passed the 2400m-marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced runway separation minima shall be subject to the following conditions: &lt;br /&gt;
* wake turbulence separation minima shall be applied&lt;br /&gt;
* visibility shall be at least 5 km and ceiling (BKN/OVC) shall not be lower than 1000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
* tailwind component shall not exceed 5 kt&lt;br /&gt;
* minimum separation continues to exist between two departing aircraft immediately after take-off of the second aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* [[traffic information]] shall be provided to the flight crew of the succeeding aircraft concerned&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall not apply between a departing aircraft and a preceding landing aircraft&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced runway separation minima shall only be applied during the hours of daylight from 30 minutes after local sunrise to 30 minutes before local sunset. (simplified VATSIM rule: once night-SIDs are in operation, RRSM is not applicable anymore)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== High traffic situations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During high traffic situations communication with adjacent approach sectors is very important. Especially during single runway operations you might have to ask for increased inbound spacing to be able to fit in departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Additional phrases during periods of high traffic  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to expedite the flow of traffic use the following phrases: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 29 cleared for takeoff, expedite&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, wind is xxx/xx runway 34 cleared to land, expedite vacating&lt;br /&gt;
 OE-ABC, wind xxx/xx, runway 29 cleared for takeoff, after departure right turn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the more difficult situations for a Tower controller. You have to consider the departure route of each aircraft to estimate the required spacing to arriving traffic. Again close coordination with approach is very important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWI.pdf LOWI QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWK.pdf LOWK QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWL.pdf LOWL QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWG.pdf LOWG QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWW.pdf LOWW QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://downloads.vacc-austria.org/Documents/QRS_LOWS.pdf LOWS QRS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vateud.net/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=article&amp;amp;id=77&amp;amp;Itemid=122 VATEUD Training Department] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICAO-Alphabet Wikipedia: Buchstabentafel]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for DEL in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Ground]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide: Approach]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4349</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4349"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:35:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Intersection departure */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3 (TFC congestion on TWY M and L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4348</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4348"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:33:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Intersection departure */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4347</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4347"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:33:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Intersection departure */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. '''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency to be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4346</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4346"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:32:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Intersection departure */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though HIRO (High Intensity Runway Operation) requires pilots to plan certain intersection departures e.g (A3, B4, B10, A10), usage of these intersection should be restricted to cases where a gain in efficiency can be accomplished. '''Avoid &amp;quot;over-using&amp;quot; e.g A3''', as there is no gain in efficiency can be expected from a 3 aircraft long queue for A3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4345</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4345"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:20:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Ground Traffic Management */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''.  You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4344</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4344"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:14:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* Additional Information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''. If an aircraft has clearance, it can roll without looking anywhere else than straight ahead. You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time. How you do this so that they don't bump into each other? It's called '''Ground Traffic Management'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4343</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Ground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Ground&amp;diff=4343"/>
		<updated>2021-02-11T23:13:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Sebastian Gosch: /* More Information */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ground is responsible for all movements of aircraft on ground, except the movements on the runway. Ground takes over responsibility for Delivery if he is not online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Ground's job? ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most aircraft have only very limited view. Therefore, '''Ground has to guide taxiing aircraft'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows, where to dock after landing. Therefore, '''Ground assigns gates''' to go to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No aircraft knows exactly, from where to take off. In fact, only Tower knows, but '''Ground is responsible to queue departing aircraft''' in the appropriate order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are no fixed directions on where to taxi on an airport, and taxiways are too narrow to have traffic in both directions. Therefore, it is '''Ground's responsibility to maintain a traffic flow''' to avoid nose-to-nose situations which (in real life) need a pushback car to resolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to set up Ground's job ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# First, contact your upstream controller and enquire the runway configuration: Where will departing aircraft take off and arriving aircraft land? You might need intermediate conversation, so you better &amp;quot;sit&amp;quot; in the same teamspeak room as your Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
# Second: make a plan on how to circle traffic: Which taxiway will you want to use which way to queue departing aircraft where? Which taxiways will you use for arriving aircraft? The trick is to have a pattern in mind that minimizes conflicts: The less crossings you have, the less you will have to pay attention on crashes. There is more information for specific airports [[Vienna|LOWW (Vienna)]] and [[LOWI_Primer|LOWI (Innsbruck)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phraseology&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles for [[Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony|Radio Telephony]] apply: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are responsible for all aircraft acting under your clearance or approval. If you have issued &amp;quot;pushback approved&amp;quot;, then the space behind him is blocked in your mind - you must not clear anyone else to go into.&lt;br /&gt;
* You are also responsible if a pilot takes a wrong turn, you have to act. This means: You have to monitor, if pilots comply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Making contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot says hello by stating: Who, where, and the request:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Wien Ground, servus. Austrian 125, Foxtrot 05 request startup and pushback.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Austrian 125, Wien Ground. start and push approved.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: Start and push approved, Austrian 125.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start-up clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start-up clearance may be given if you expect the aircraft to depart in a timely manner. (coordinate with GND and TWR accordingly) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start-up approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Push-back clearance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Push-back clearance can be given if no other aircraft is passing behind and the parking position requires push-back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, push-back approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. It also means, that the space behind the aircraft is reserved in your mind. You won't clear anyone to taxi behind this aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the aircraft does not initiate pushback within an adequate timeframe, you may cancel the pushback clearance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA123 Pushback clearance cancelled, I call you (back).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you may clear anyone else to pass behind, and you have to re-issue the clearance later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Start and Push clearance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these two phrases together&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Austrian 125, start(-up) and push(-back) approved&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxi Instructions  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind: Taxi instructions are '''clearances''', that means: The pilot must and will do it regardless of other things - they don't have a great amount of choice. Don't clear anyone for taxiing around, without knowing that the path is safe for the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot will conduct startup and pushback. As soon as he is ready for taxi he will call you: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125: AUA125, request taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on traffic you can give him the taxi instruction to his departure runway: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, taxi to holding point Rwy 16 via L and W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, how do you maintain traffic flow at a busy airport?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to clear the aircraft to an intermediate stopping position: &amp;quot;Taxi via E hold before EX24&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi via the Blue Line and E, Hold before EX24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also add a condition to this to keep things moving:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125, Taxi H/P RWY 29 via Blue Line, E, EX24 and EX1, '''on E behind Company Airbus From the right'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means: the A/C has to &amp;quot;hold before&amp;quot; (=to stop) in mid way '''for a condition which you specify'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This could be only to &amp;quot;hold short&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; until you tell them to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;behind the A320 from left to right&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will stop, wait for a passing A320 and continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* It could be &amp;quot;follow company A320 taxiing on L&amp;quot; --&amp;gt; the pilot will look out for a A320 of his own airline and follow them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Hold before&amp;quot; argument reduces your workload, as the pilot must now judge if they can meet the conditions given. As a controller, it is no good idea to tell pilots something they can't do (i.e. look behind) - pilots might oversee it and.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind that it is the '''controllers' job to decide on wingspan clearance'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On VATSIM, you sometimes meet pilots who apparently don't have charts and/or lose orientation - especially when it is dark and the scenery is outdated. If a pilot starts sight-seeing, you can tell them to '''stop (&amp;quot;hold position&amp;quot;)''' and to '''&amp;quot;expect progressive taxi&amp;quot;''', and that means: you taxi him step by step, and they are instructed to stop at every step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an aircraft is approaching its assigned holding-point (and clear of possible traffic-conflict) a hand-off to next higher position (i.e. TWR) shall be initiated as soon as the aircraft is conflict-free in your area of responsibility. This means, if no other aircraft can be in the way on his way to the runway. Example for LOWW: Suppose, RWY 29 - GND will line up all aircraft on taxiway M facing East. Hand them over to TWR as soon as practibale. '''Avoid unnecessary intermediate stops of taxiing aircraft'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA125 Contact Wien Tower on 119,400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Air-taxiing is the Movement of a helicopter / VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed of normally less than 20 KT (37 km/h). Please Note: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25 FT (8 m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo sling loads. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;OEBXR: request air taxi to Runway 29.&lt;br /&gt;
GND: OEBXR, contact TWR 119.400.&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: Servus Wien Tower, request air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M.&lt;br /&gt;
TWR: OEBXR, air taxi to Runway 29 via Exit 13 and M. wind 280 deg 5 knots&lt;br /&gt;
OEBXR: air taxi to Runway 29 via M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Traffic Management  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear in mind, that '''it is GND's job that they can taxi freely'''. If an aircraft has clearance, it can roll without looking anywhere else than straight ahead. You must see if the way is clear. But on a busy evening, you will have 5-10 aircraft taxiing at the same time. How you do this so that they don't bump into each other? It's called '''Ground Traffic Management'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To organize the traffic on ground different techniques are available, some of them relying on the pilots seeing each other. Generally you should avoid clearing two aircraft onto crossing pathways, unless you are sure they will never meet each other. To achieve this you should instruct aircraft to hold short of taxiways in the way stated above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few tools which you can use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Taxiway configurations====&lt;br /&gt;
Only one aircraft can taxi on a taxiway, so you have to order the traffic flow. On larger airports, you set the rules where outbound and where inbound aircraft roll. For LOWW, there is a nice document by [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf Patrick Hrusa] (thanks!). For LOWI, there is a nice [[LOWI_Primer]] by Claus and Hermann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Step-by-step clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
A very secure, but time-consuming way to control. Clear the aircraft only as far as it is definitely clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via E hold before M.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via M, hold before Exit 7.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi via L, hold clear of Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, continue to gate D21 via Exit 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditional clearance====&lt;br /&gt;
This provides much more flow, but you have to think in advance. See, which aircraft approach to where and give one of them a conditional clearance to stop some point and give way. Make sure that the condition is clear: a specific intersection, a precise plane from a precise direction, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, taxi to gate D21 via E, M and Exit 9, On M give way to company A320 from the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Conditional clearance&amp;quot; means: AUA251 is free to taxi until its final clearance limit (D21), but stops inbetween until the condition is met, in this case: another Austrian A320 taxiing (presumably on D) and turning in before him. Then, he is free to continue without instruction. &amp;quot;Hold short&amp;quot; means: You are cleared to your destination, but you should stop inbetween.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Intermediate instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, things go differently as expected: Aircraft stop to sort out checklists, or they speed up. You might need to re-clear or stop the plane, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, hold position.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, continue.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, hold before W, B190 crossing right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: AUA251, gate change, taxi to gate F1 via M, EX7, at EX7 behind Swiss A320 crossing right - left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Progressive Taxi====&lt;br /&gt;
Some pilots don't know how to taxi, and some don't know where to taxi, and they can drive you mad. To them, you can issue progressive taxi instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Leipzig Air 600, turn next left hold next intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND: Leipzig Air 600, turn right, on third intersection left and hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example====&lt;br /&gt;
Consider the following situation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| You are the Ground Controller at Vienna Airport. Runways active are 34 for landing and 29 for departure. DLH6KM has vacated rwy 34 and requests taxi to its parking position. LZB421 is ready for taxi at stand B95.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:DLH6KM taxi to stand C40 via taxiway D and L.&lt;br /&gt;
 DLH6KM:Taxiing to stand C40 via D and L, DLH6KM.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:Wien ground LZB421 stand B95, ready for taxi.&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, Taxi via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
 LZB421:via L, hold before EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The aircraft are now both approaching EX11.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 GND:LZB421, When clear of the opposite 737, continue EX11 and M to H/P RWY 29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you have to make sure that this instruction is unambiguous, so there shouldn't be two DLH B737s in the area. Also in low visibility operations this procedure might not work very well, in this case you might have to give the aircraft the instruction to continue taxi when the other aircraft has passed. In some cases it is also useful to let one aircraft follow the other: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;GND:LZB421, at EX2 follow Austrian DASH 8 from the right to holding point runway 29.&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special Case Northern F stands====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As this area is equipped with 3 parallel Taxilines, those being Taxiline 40 Center, Blue Line and Orange Line, it is vital to make use of these Lines in a sensible manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxiline 40 Center is issued to Heavy A/C up to a maximum Wingspan of 68.4 Meters&lt;br /&gt;
*Blue and Orange Line may be issued to two A/C taxiing in parallel up to a maximum Wingspan of 36 Meters. This gives the Controller the ability to essentially double the flow rate in this area as also pushback may be conducted onto either of those lines. Make sure to state this in the Push Clearance accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;AUA9LT Start and Push approved - Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology in this area is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position F08 via the Blue Line&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Taxi to Position G26 via Taxiline 40 Center&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Positions G16, G26 and G36 are used for Heavy A/C and are collocated with their respective F counterparts F16, F26 and F36. Nevertheless they provide greater wingtip clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swingovers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option to make use of this infrastructure is to clear &amp;quot;swingovers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AUA9LT Swingover Orange Line continue W to H/P RWY 16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is particularly useful to clear e.g the Blue Line for incoming traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intersection departure  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some flights do not need the whole length of their given departure runway so they might request takeoff from an intersection somewhere down the runway. This procedure is called a intersection takeoff. You should only grant this in coordination with Tower and if traffic situation permits. Also at some airports intersections are used to be more flexible in the departure sequence (see section [[Study Guide:Tower#Departure_Seperation_-_Based_on_Type_of_Aircraft_and_departure_route|Departure Seperation]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology to ask an A/C for its ability to make use of an intersection is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; AUA4CM can you accept B4? &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
if answered positively -&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Roger, join B4 (report ready) &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Situations (High Traffic, Slots, ...)  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Intermediate Holding Positions (IHP) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dynamic and high TFC situations it is advisable to make use of intermediate clearances to keep both your and the pilots flexibility to change route at a maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore suggested to make use of IHPs such as:&lt;br /&gt;
*M2 &lt;br /&gt;
*L2 &lt;br /&gt;
*Blue 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Orange 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless you should try to keep the A/C moving and avoid unnecessary stops at these positions if they are of no use to your flow management.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Slots  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the above mentioned slot regulations are in force ground has the responsibility to set up a departure sequence in a way that the aircraft do not miss their slot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opposite runway operations  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At some austrian airports it is very common to use opposite runway configurations (departure and arrival runway are opposite to each other). In these situations it can happen very fast that you have two aircraft facing each other nose to nose. Special attention should be paid to avoid this situation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mind the wingtip: Size matters to GND controllers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As GND controller, you have to watch out for the size of an aircraft. You have two indications for the aircraft size in Euroscope: The Letter &amp;quot;L/M/H/S&amp;quot; in the flight strip, and the precise aircraft type in the departure list or tag - an abbreviation which you might need to google, but you will learn over time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Light aircraft''' (L) need to go to stands, not to docks (you won't want to dock a Cessna, will you?). But &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; is not &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; - on some GAC aprons the aircraft has to be really light, especially when it comes to grass surface. Watch out to the aircraft type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Medium aircraft''' have a different trouble: Some of them (like the Beech 99, the Dash or the Avro RJ are medium, but they need stands. Others, not much bigger, like the Fokker 70 or 100, can dock at the gate, whereas others (like the A319), only a little bigger, usually dock. In doubt: ask the pilot. The medium category goes up to the most-frequent cruisers A320 and B737.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Heavy aircraft''' are (almost) everything above: A330, B767 and B747, the MD11 and the new B787. They almost exclusively dock, but there is another risk: Not all docks are suitable for heavies - ground charts tell you more. Check this chart [https://charts.vacc-austria.org/LOWW/LOWW_Ground_Docking%20Positions_26032020.pdf] to verify where you can park which A/C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Superheavy aircraft''' e.g The A380 - which is parked at '''F35, D27 or H98.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as hint for parking, you could use follow flow Chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Flow chart.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information relating to traffic flow management on ground in different configurations, please refer to: [http://www.flightdirector.net/data/VACC_Austria_ATMM.pdf ATMM Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really want to study hard, then read the relevant sections for GND in the official [http://www.austrocontrol.at/jart/prj3/austro_control/data/dokumente/YQPMe_LO_Circ_2012_B_04_en.pdf radio telephony guide from Austrocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A really good index (and much more orderly is [http://contentzone.eurocontrol.int/phraseology/ here at Eurocontrol].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'' Prev: [[Study Guide:Delivery]] - Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Tower]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]] [[Category:Study_Guides]] [[Category:Training]] [[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Sebastian Gosch</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>